Extron electronic Switch 450 Plus User Manual
CrossPoint 450 Plus Series  
MAV Plus series  
Large Scale Matrix Sw itchers  
68-521-03 Re v. A  
03 06  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Quick Start — CrossPoint 450 Plus  
and MAV Plus Switchers  
Installation of multiple BME system  
Rack mount the switcher BMEs.  
Step 1 — Numbering the BMEs  
64  
63  
Each BME must be set to a unique address of 0 through 5.  
62  
BME address switch — To set the BME address, press the  
61  
+ and - buttons on the BME Address switch on the rear  
panel of the switcher BMEs, as shown at right.  
Addresses 6 through 9 are invalid.  
The addresses used in the system must be sequential  
with no skipped numbers.  
N
E
T
O
M
E
R
x
x
T
Sync BMEs cannot be set to address 0  
LAN  
E
R
M
B
S
S
E
R
D
D
A
BME 0 is the controlling unit. All control  
communications and front panel operations shuld be  
made through BME 0 only.  
N
M
M
O
K
4
C
E
LIN  
M
B
T
AC  
T
X
E
C
N
Y
T
S
U
O
4
Step 2 — Daisy chaining the BMEs  
If the matrix switcher system consists of more than one  
BME, the BMEs must be connected together in a daisy  
chain using Extron-supplied RJ-45 cables.  
64  
63  
BME COMM interconnect ports — Connect the first daisy chain  
from BME 0’s BME Comm Out connector to the nearest BME’s  
BME Comm In connector as shown at right. In a rack whose  
BMEs are arranged so that their physical location matches the  
BME address numbering, this would be BME 1. But since not all  
systems are configured alike, call this module BME n.  
62  
61  
E
T
O
M
E
R
Connect the next RJ-45 cable from BME n’s BME Comm Out  
connector to the nearest unconnected BME’s (BME n+1’s) BME  
Comm In connector.  
x
T
LAN  
x
E
R
M
B
S
S
E
R
D
D
T
E
A
S
E
R
M
M
O
4
C
E
LINK  
M
B
T
Continue connecting RJ-45 cables from each daisy-chained  
module’s BME Comm Out connector to the next module’s BME  
Comm In connector until all modules are included in the chain.  
When all of the BMEs are connected, each of the BMEs in the  
system is connected to at least one other BME via the BME Comm  
connectors.  
AC  
T
X
E
C
N
Y
T
S
OU  
From BME  
To BME  
I/O Connections  
Step 3 — Inputs  
a. Video and sync BMEs — Connect a single plane of video or sync, as appropriate to the BME, to  
the BNC connectors on the video and sync BMEs for each input.  
Each BME supports one video or sync plane only. See figure 1-1 in chapter 1 for an example  
N
configuration.  
b. Audio BME — Connect balanced or unbalanced stereo or mono audio inputs, as appropriate to  
the BME type, to the 5-pole (stereo) or 3-pole (mono) captive screw connectors.  
Tip  
Ring  
Tip  
Sleeve  
Tip  
Ring  
Sleeves  
Sleeve(s)  
Tip  
Tip  
0.2” (5 mm) max.  
Do not tin the wires!  
Ring  
Sleeve  
Balanced Stereo Input  
Unbalanced Stereo Input  
Mono Input  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Quick Start  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
QS-1  
Quick Start — CrossPoint 450 Plus  
and MAV Plus Switchers, cont’d  
Step 4 — Outputs  
Front Panel Controls  
a. Video and sync BMEs — Connect a single  
plane of video or sync, as appropriate to the  
BME, to the BNC connectors on the video  
and sync BMEs for each output.  
Input and output buttons select inputs and  
outputs. Output buttons light amber to  
indicate video and audio ties. The buttons  
light green to indicate video-only ties. The  
buttons light red to indicate audio-only ties.  
Input and output buttons also select presets.  
Each BME supports one video or sync  
plane only. See figure 1-1 in chapter 1 for  
an example configuration.  
N
The output buttons also display the selected  
input’s audio level.  
b. Audio BME — Connect balanced or  
unbalanced stereo audio or mono audio  
devices, as appropriate to the BME type, to  
the captive screw connectors.  
The input buttons also display the selected  
output’s volume level.  
Enter button saves changes.  
Tip  
Ring  
Sleeve(s)  
Tip  
Tip  
See caution  
Sleeve  
Tip  
See caution  
Preset button saves a configuration as a preset or  
Ring  
recalls a previously-defined preset.  
Balanced Stereo Output  
Unbalanced Stereo Output  
View button selects a view-only mode  
that prevents inadvertent configuration  
changes. In systems with audio BMEs, View  
decrements the level and volume.  
C Connect the sleeve to ground.  
Connecting the sleeve to a negative (-)  
terminal will damage the audio output  
circuits.  
Esc button cancels selections in progress and  
resets the front panel button indications.  
The Esc button does not reset: the current  
configuration, the RGBHV and audio  
Tip  
Ring  
Sleeves  
0.2” (5 mm) max.  
Do not tin the wires!  
Mono Output  
selection, any presets, or any audio level  
or volume settings. In systems with audio  
BMEs, Esc increments the level and volume.  
Step 4 — RS-232/RS-422  
If desired, connect a control system or computer  
to the Remote RS-232/RS-422 port.  
RGBHV and Audio buttons select/deselect  
video and/or audio. The Audio button blinks  
to indicate audio breakaway. The Audio  
button also selects the audio level/adjust mode.  
Pin RS-232Function RS-422 Function  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
—
Not used  
—
Not used  
TX Transmit  
RX Receive  
—
TX– Transmit (–)  
RX– Receive (–)  
1
5
6
9
Create a tie  
Not used  
—
Not used  
Gnd Ground  
Not used  
Gnd Ground  
1. Press and release the  
RGBHV and/or Audio  
I/O button(s) to select  
or deselect video  
I / O  
—
—
—
—
Not used  
Not used  
Not used  
Not used  
—
RGBHV AUDIO  
RX+ Receive (+)  
TX+ Transmit (+)  
—
Not used  
and/or audio as  
Green = selected. Red = selected.  
Off = deselected. Off = deselected.  
desired.  
Step 5 — Ethernet  
The button lights to  
indicate the selection.  
2. Press and release the  
If desired, connect a network WAN or  
desired input button.  
LAN hub, a control system, or computer  
to the Ethernet RJ-45 port. See chapter 2,  
Installation, for details.  
3. Press and release the desired  
5
output button(s).  
• Network connection — Wire as a patch  
Amber indicates RGBHV/video and audio tie.  
Green indicates RGBHV/video only tie.  
Red indicates audio only tie.  
(straight) cable.  
•
Computer or control system connection —  
Wire the interface cable as a crossover  
cable.  
ENTER  
3 4 8  
Green indicates the need  
to confirm the change.  
Step 6 — Power  
Plug the switcher into a grounded AC source.  
4. Press and release the Enter button.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Quick Start  
QS-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Chapter One • Introduction ......................................................................................................1-1  
About this Manual.....................................................................................................................1-2  
About the Matrix Switchers................................................................................................1-2  
Definitions......................................................................................................................................1-5  
Features............................................................................................................................................1-5  
Chapter Two • Installation ........................................................................................................2-1  
Mounting the Switcher ..........................................................................................................2-2  
Rear Panel Views........................................................................................................................2-2  
Video or sync input and output (systems with video and sync BMEs) ..............................2-3  
Sync termination switches (systems with sync BMEs) ..........................................................2-4  
Audio input and output (systems with audio BMEs)...........................................................2-4  
BME connection and selection................................................................................................2-6  
RS-232/RS-422 ............................................................................................................................2-8  
Ethernet......................................................................................................................................2-8  
Cabling and RJ-45 connector wiring ..................................................................................2-9  
Reset button ............................................................................................................................2-10  
External sync (systems with MAV Plus Video BMEs) ..........................................................2-10  
Power........................................................................................................................................2-11  
Front Panel Configuration Port.......................................................................................2-12  
Chapter Three • Operation ........................................................................................................3-1  
Front Panel Controls and Indicators...............................................................................3-2  
Definitions..................................................................................................................................3-3  
Input and output buttons........................................................................................................3-3  
Control buttons.........................................................................................................................3-4  
I/O controls.................................................................................................................................3-7  
Power indicators........................................................................................................................3-8  
Button icons...............................................................................................................................3-8  
QS-FPC Front Panel Operations..........................................................................................3-9  
Power..........................................................................................................................................3-9  
Creating a configuration .........................................................................................................3-9  
Example 1: Creating a set of video and audio ties..........................................................3-10  
Example 2: Adding a tie to a set of video and audio ties...............................................3-12  
Example 3: Removing a tie from a set of video and audio ties......................................3-14  
Viewing a configuration........................................................................................................3-16  
Example 4: Viewing video and audio, audio only, and video only ties..........................3-17  
I/O grouping.............................................................................................................................3-20  
Example 5: Grouping inputs and outputs........................................................................3-22  
Setting RGB delay (systems with wideband BMEs)............................................................3-24  
Example 6: Setting the RGB delay for an output ............................................................3-24  
Using presets............................................................................................................................3-26  
Example 7: Saving a preset ...............................................................................................3-26  
Example 8: Recalling a preset...........................................................................................3-28  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Table of Contents  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
i
Table of Contents, cont’d  
Muting and unmuting video and/or audio outputs ..........................................................3-29  
Example 9: Muting and unmuting an output..................................................................3-30  
Viewing and adjusting the input audio level (systems with audio BMEs)......................3-32  
Example 10: Viewing and adjusting an input audio level ..............................................3-33  
Viewing and adjusting the output volume (systems with audio BMEs) .........................3-35  
Reading the displayed volume .........................................................................................3-36  
Example 11: Viewing and adjusting an output volume level.........................................3-38  
Locking out the front panel (Executive mode) ................................................................3-40  
Performing a system reset from the front panel................................................................3-40  
Background illumination .......................................................................................................3-41  
Selecting the rear panel Remote port protocol and baud rate .......................................3-42  
Rear Panel Controls.................................................................................................................3-43  
Performing soft system resets...............................................................................................3-43  
Performing a hard reset.........................................................................................................3-45  
Optimizing the Audio (Systems with Audio BMEs)............................................3-45  
Troubleshooting........................................................................................................................3-46  
General checks.........................................................................................................................3-46  
Plasma display S-video problem (CrossPoint 450 Plus wideband BMEs only) ................3-46  
Configuration Worksheets.................................................................................................3-46  
Worksheet example 1: System equipment..........................................................................3-46  
Worksheet example 2: Daily configuration.........................................................................3-48  
Worksheet example 3: Test configuration ..........................................................................3-50  
Blank configuration worksheet ............................................................................................3-51  
Chapter Four • SIS Programming and Control...........................................................4-1  
RS-232 and RS-422 Links.........................................................................................................4-2  
Rear panel Remote port...........................................................................................................4-2  
Front panel Configuration port..............................................................................................4-3  
Ethernet Link...............................................................................................................................4-4  
Ethernet connection.................................................................................................................4-4  
Host-to-Switcher Instructions.............................................................................................4-5  
Switcher-Initiated Messages...............................................................................................4-5  
Switcher Error Responses.....................................................................................................4-6  
Using the Command/Response Tables...........................................................................4-6  
Symbol definitions....................................................................................................................4-7  
Command/response table for SIS commands........................................................................4-8  
Command/response table for IP SIS commands..................................................................4-19  
Symbol definitions.............................................................................................................4-19  
Special Characters ...................................................................................................................4-22  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Table of Contents  
ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter Five • Matrix Software.............................................................................................5-1  
Matrix Switchers Control Program.................................................................................5-2  
Installing the software .............................................................................................................5-2  
Software operation via Ethernet............................................................................................5-2  
Ethernet protocol settings..................................................................................................5-3  
Using the software....................................................................................................................5-3  
IP Settings/Options window ....................................................................................................5-7  
Matrix IP Address field........................................................................................................5-8  
Extron Name/Descriptor field .............................................................................................5-8  
Gateway IP address field.....................................................................................................5-9  
Subnet Mask field................................................................................................................5-9  
Hardware Address field.......................................................................................................5-9  
Use DHCP checkbox.............................................................................................................5-9  
Date field .............................................................................................................................5-9  
Time (local) field................................................................................................................5-10  
Sync Time to PC button.....................................................................................................5-10  
GMT (offset) field ..............................................................................................................5-10  
Use Daylight Savings checkbox.........................................................................................5-10  
Administrator Password field ...........................................................................................5-11  
User Password field ...........................................................................................................5-11  
Mail Server IP Address field ..............................................................................................5-12  
Mail Server Domain Name field........................................................................................5-12  
E-mail Addressee fields .....................................................................................................5-13  
Update firmware.....................................................................................................................5-14  
Upload HTML files...................................................................................................................5-15  
Windows buttons, drop boxes, and trash ...........................................................................5-16  
Windows menus......................................................................................................................5-16  
File menu ...........................................................................................................................5-16  
Tools menu.........................................................................................................................5-17  
Preferences menu..............................................................................................................5-18  
Master-Reset selection ......................................................................................................5-19  
Using emulation mode...........................................................................................................5-20  
Using the help system ............................................................................................................5-20  
Special Characters ...................................................................................................................5-20  
Button-Label Generator.......................................................................................................5-20  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Table of Contents  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iii  
Table of Contents, cont’d  
Chapter 6 • HTML Operation.....................................................................................................6-1  
Download the Startup Page................................................................................................6-2  
System Status Page ..................................................................................................................6-3  
DSVP page (systems with a sync BME only)...........................................................................6-4  
System Configuration Page.................................................................................................6-5  
IP Settings fields........................................................................................................................6-6  
Unit Name field ...................................................................................................................6-6  
DHCP radio buttons.............................................................................................................6-6  
IP Address field....................................................................................................................6-6  
Gateway IP Address field ....................................................................................................6-6  
Subnet Mask field................................................................................................................6-6  
MAC Address field...............................................................................................................6-6  
Date/Time Settings fields .........................................................................................................6-7  
Passwords page .........................................................................................................................6-8  
Email Settings page ..................................................................................................................6-9  
Mail IP Address field............................................................................................................6-9  
Domain Name field .............................................................................................................6-9  
Email address fields...........................................................................................................6-10  
Firmware Upgrade page........................................................................................................6-10  
File Management Page.........................................................................................................6-12  
Set and View Ties Page.........................................................................................................6-13  
Create a tie...............................................................................................................................6-14  
RGBHV and Audio Settings page..........................................................................................6-14  
Change the input gain and attenuation (systems with audio BMEs).............................6-15  
Mute and unmute one or all outputs ..............................................................................6-16  
Change the RGB delay (systems with CrossPoint 450 Plus sync BMEs)...........................6-17  
Change the output volume level (systems with audio BMEs).........................................6-18  
Global Presets page ................................................................................................................6-20  
Save a preset......................................................................................................................6-20  
Recall a preset....................................................................................................................6-20  
Special Characters ...................................................................................................................6-21  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Table of Contents  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A • Ethernet Connection.................................................................................... A-1  
Ethernet Link ............................................................................................................................... A-2  
Ethernet connection................................................................................................................ A-2  
Default address ........................................................................................................................ A-2  
Pinging to determine Extron IP address............................................................................ A-3  
Pinging to determine Web IP address............................................................................... A-3  
Connecting as a Telnet client ................................................................................................. A-4  
Telnet tips............................................................................................................................ A-4  
Open.............................................................................................................................. A-4  
Escape character and Esc key ....................................................................................... A-5  
Local echo...................................................................................................................... A-5  
Set carriage return-line feed........................................................................................ A-5  
Close .............................................................................................................................. A-5  
Help ............................................................................................................................... A-5  
Quit................................................................................................................................ A-5  
Subnetting — A Primer.......................................................................................................... A-6  
Gateways................................................................................................................................... A-6  
Local and remote devices........................................................................................................ A-6  
IP addresses and octets............................................................................................................ A-6  
Subnet masks and octets......................................................................................................... A-6  
Determining whether devices are on the same subnet ..................................................... A-7  
Appendix B • Reference Information................................................................................B-1  
CrossPoint 450 Plus Specifications..................................................................................B-2  
MAV Plus Specifications.........................................................................................................B-4  
Part Numbers and Accessories...........................................................................................B-7  
CrossPoint 450 Plus system part numbers..............................................................................B-7  
MAV Plus system part numbers...............................................................................................B-8  
BME part numbers....................................................................................................................B-9  
CrossPoint 450 Plus wideband video BMEs......................................................................B-10  
CrossPoint 450 Plus sync BMEs..........................................................................................B-10  
MAV Plus video BMEs........................................................................................................B-10  
MAV Plus stereo audio BMEs............................................................................................B-11  
MAV Plus mono audio BMEs.............................................................................................B-11  
Included parts....................................................................................................................B-11  
Replacement parts.............................................................................................................B-11  
Optional accessories ...............................................................................................................B-12  
Cables........................................................................................................................................B-12  
Bulk cable...........................................................................................................................B-12  
Terminated cable assemblies ............................................................................................B-13  
Button Labels..............................................................................................................................B-14  
Installing labels in the matrix switcher’s buttons...............................................................B-14  
Button label blanks.................................................................................................................B-15  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Table of Contents  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v
Table of Contents, cont’d  
All trademarks mentioned in this manual are the properties of their respective owners.  
68-521-03 A  
03 06  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Table of Contents  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers  
Chapter One  
1
Introduction  
About this Manual  
About the Matrix Switchers  
Definitions  
Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation  
About this Manual  
This manual contains installation, configuration, and operating information for the  
Extron family of full-function, very large CrossPoint 450 Plus ultra-wideband and  
MAV Plus 3248 through 6464 video and audio matrix switchers.  
About the Matrix Switchers  
Matrix switchers distribute any input to any combination of outputs. The matrix  
switchers can route multiple input/output configurations simultaneously.  
The Extron very large CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus matrix switchers are a  
family of matrix switcher basic module enclosures (BMEs) that allow you to create  
a video and/or audio matrix switching system with up to 64 inputs and 64 outputs  
specifically tailored to meet your requirements. All BMEs are rack mountable. All  
video and sync BMEs are 6U in height; audio BMEs are 7U in height. This family of  
matrix switcher BMEs includes the following models:  
•
CrossPoint 450 Plus Wideband video switcher BME — A switcher  
that routes one video plane (red [R], green [G], and blue [B]) from any  
input to any one or more outputs. This BME has a video bandwidth of  
450 MHz (–3 dB), fully loaded, to support video resolutions of 1600 x 1200  
and above.  
•
•
CrossPoint 450 Plus Sync switcher BME — A switcher that routes one sync  
plane (horizontal [H], vertical [V], or composite sync [S]) from any input to  
any one or more outputs..  
MAV Plus Video switcher BME — A switcher that routes one plane of low  
resolution (NTSC/PAL/SECAM) component video (Y, R-Y, or B-Y), S-video  
(Y or C), and composite video from any input to any one or more outputs.  
This BME has a video bandwidth of 150 MHz (–3 dB), fully loaded, to  
support all video resolutions.  
•
•
MAV Plus Stereo Audio switcher BME — A switcher that routes balanced  
or unbalanced stereo audio (two audio planes) from any input to any one or  
more outputs.  
MAV Plus Mono Audio switcher BME — A switcher that routes mono audio  
(one audio plane) from any input to any one or more outputs.  
Each BME model is available in the following matrix sizes:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
3248  
3264  
4832  
4848  
4864  
6432  
6448  
6464  
(32 inputs by 48 outputs)  
(32 inputs by 64 outputs)  
(48 inputs by 32 outputs)  
(48 inputs by 48 outputs)  
(48 inputs by 64 outputs)  
(64 inputs by 32 outputs)  
(64 inputs by 48 outputs)  
(64 inputs by 64 outputs)  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Introduction  
1-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Some BMEs are equipped with an integrated QuickSwitch-Front Panel Controller  
(QS-FPC™):  
•
•
•
•
•
The CrossPoint 450 Plus Video BME is available with or without a QS-FPC.  
The MAV Plus video BME is always equipped with a QS-FPC.  
The CrossPoint 450 Plus Sync BME is not available with a QS-FPC.  
The MAV Plus audio BME (stereo or mono) is not available with a QS-FPC.  
BMEs without a QS-FPC are equipped with a blank front panel.  
A wideband (RGBHV or RGBS) video matrix switcher system requires a  
CrossPoint 450 Plus Wideband BME for each video plane (red, green, and blue)  
and a CrossPoint 450 Plus Sync BME for each sync plane (H and V [two planes]  
or composite sync [one plane]). To add audio to the system requires a MAV Plus  
Stereo or Mono BME (figure 1-1).  
TCP/IP  
Network  
CrossPoint 450 Plus 6464  
Sync Matrix (horizontal)  
CrossPoint 450 Plus 6464  
Ultra-Wideband Matrix (red)  
BME 3  
BME 0  
ANAHEIM, CA  
ANAHEIM, CA  
OUTPUTS  
1
-
16  
3
OUTPUTS 33 48  
-
OUTPUTS  
1
-
16  
3
OUTPUTS 33 48  
-
1
2
4
8
33  
34  
38  
42  
46  
35  
39  
43  
47  
36  
40  
44  
48  
1
2
4
8
33  
34  
38  
42  
46  
35  
39  
43  
47  
36  
40  
44  
48  
IN  
P
4
U
T
5
S
IN  
P
4
U
T
5
S
1
9
2
3
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
9
2
3
6
7
8
75  
5
9
6
7
37  
41  
45  
5
9
6
7
37  
41  
45  
510  
10 12 14 16  
11 13 15  
10  
18  
26  
34  
42  
50  
58  
11  
19  
27  
35  
43  
51  
59  
12  
20  
28  
36  
44  
52  
60  
13  
21  
29  
37  
45  
53  
61  
14  
22  
30  
38  
46  
54  
62  
15  
23  
31  
39  
47  
55  
63  
16  
24  
32  
40  
48  
56  
64  
10  
18  
26  
34  
42  
50  
58  
11  
19  
27  
35  
43  
51  
59  
12  
20  
28  
36  
44  
52  
60  
13  
21  
29  
37  
45  
53  
61  
14  
22  
30  
38  
46  
54  
62  
15  
23  
31  
39  
47  
55  
63  
16  
24  
32  
40  
48  
56  
64  
9
75  
10  
14  
11  
15  
12  
16  
10  
14  
11  
15  
12  
16  
510  
17  
25  
33  
41  
49  
57  
17  
25  
33  
41  
49  
57  
13  
13  
OUTPUTS 17  
-
32  
OUTPUTS 49  
-
64  
OUTPUTS 17  
-
32  
OUTPUTS 49  
-
64  
17  
18  
22  
26  
30  
19  
20  
24  
28  
32  
49  
50  
54  
58  
62  
51  
52  
56  
60  
64  
17  
18  
22  
26  
30  
19  
20  
24  
28  
32  
49  
50  
54  
58  
62  
51  
52  
56  
60  
64  
21  
25  
29  
23  
27  
31  
53  
57  
61  
55  
59  
63  
21  
25  
29  
23  
27  
31  
53  
57  
61  
55  
59  
63  
BME  
ADDRESS LAN  
BME  
ADDRESS LAN  
EXT  
SYNC  
BME COMM  
BME COMM  
-
4
+
-
4
+
L
ISTED  
1T23  
L
I
S
T
E
D
C
U S  
1
T
T.  
2
E
3
.
I.T.E.  
C
U S  
I
.
ACT LINK  
IN  
OUT  
ACT LINK  
IN  
OUT  
Computer  
CrossPoint 450 Plus 6464  
Ultra-Wideband Matrix (green)  
CrossPoint 450 Plus 6464  
Sync Matrix (vertical)  
BME 1  
BME 4  
Projector  
ANAHEIM, CA  
ANAHEIM, CA  
OUTPUTS  
1
-
16  
OUTPUTS 33  
-
48  
OUTPUTS  
1
-
16  
OUTPUTS 33 48  
-
1
2
3
4
33  
34  
38  
42  
46  
35  
39  
43  
47  
36  
40  
44  
48  
1
2
3
4
33  
34  
38  
42  
46  
35  
39  
43  
47  
36  
40  
44  
48  
IN  
P
4
U
T
S
5
IN  
P
4
U
T
5
S
1
9
2
3
6
7
8
1
9
2
3
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
75  
5
9
6
7
8
37  
41  
45  
5
9
6
7
8
37  
41  
45  
510  
10  
18  
26  
34  
42  
50  
58  
11  
19  
27  
35  
43  
51  
59  
12  
20  
28  
36  
44  
52  
60  
13  
21  
29  
37  
45  
53  
61  
14  
22  
30  
38  
46  
54  
62  
15  
23  
31  
39  
47  
55  
63  
16  
24  
32  
40  
48  
56  
64  
10  
18  
26  
34  
42  
50  
58  
11  
19  
27  
35  
43  
51  
59  
12  
20  
28  
36  
44  
52  
60  
13  
21  
29  
37  
45  
53  
61  
14  
22  
30  
38  
46  
54  
62  
15  
23  
31  
39  
47  
55  
63  
16  
24  
32  
40  
48  
56  
64  
10 12 14 16  
11 13 15  
9
75  
10  
14  
11  
15  
12  
16  
10  
14  
11  
15  
12  
16  
510  
17  
25  
33  
41  
49  
57  
17  
25  
33  
41  
49  
57  
13  
13  
OUTPUTS 17  
17  
-
19  
32  
OUTPUTS 49  
49  
-
64  
OUTPUTS 17  
17  
-
19  
32  
OUTPUTS 49  
49  
-
64  
18  
22  
26  
30  
20  
24  
28  
32  
50  
54  
58  
62  
51  
52  
56  
60  
64  
18  
22  
26  
30  
20  
24  
28  
32  
50  
54  
58  
62  
51  
52  
56  
60  
64  
21  
25  
29  
23  
27  
31  
53  
57  
61  
55  
59  
63  
21  
25  
29  
23  
27  
31  
53  
57  
61  
55  
59  
63  
Control  
System  
BME  
ADDRESS LAN  
BME  
ADDRESS LAN  
EXT  
SYNC  
BME COMM  
BME COMM  
-
-
4
+
4
+
L
I
1
.
S
T
T.  
T
2
E
E
3
.
D
L
ISTED  
1T23  
C
U S  
C
U S  
I
I.T.E.  
ACT LINK  
ACT LINK  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
MAV Plus 6464  
CrossPoint 450 Plus 6464  
Sound  
System  
Stereo Audio Matrix  
BME 5  
BME 2  
Ultra-Wideband Matrix (blue)  
ANAHEIM, CA  
ANAHEIM, CA  
1
2
3
4
17  
18  
19  
20  
33  
34  
38  
35  
36  
49  
50  
51  
55  
52  
OUTPUTS  
1
-
16  
OUTPUTS 33 48  
-
1
2
3
4
33  
34  
38  
42  
46  
35  
39  
43  
47  
36  
40  
44  
48  
IN  
P
U
T
S
1
9
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
21  
22  
23  
24  
37  
41  
39  
43  
40  
44  
53  
57  
54  
58  
56  
5
9
6
7
8
37  
10  
18  
26  
34  
42  
50  
58  
11  
19  
27  
35  
43  
51  
59  
12  
20  
28  
36  
44  
52  
60  
13  
21  
29  
37  
45  
53  
61  
14  
22  
30  
38  
46  
54  
62  
15  
23  
31  
39  
47  
55  
63  
16  
24  
32  
40  
48  
56  
64  
9
10  
11  
12  
25  
26  
27  
28  
42  
59  
60  
10  
14  
11  
15  
12  
16  
41  
45  
17  
25  
33  
41  
49  
57  
13  
13  
14  
15  
16  
29  
30  
31  
32  
45  
46  
47  
48  
61  
62  
63  
64  
INPUTS  
OUTPUTS 17  
17  
-
32  
OUTPUTS 49  
-
64  
18  
22  
26  
30  
19  
20  
24  
28  
32  
49  
50  
54  
58  
62  
51  
52  
56  
60  
64  
21  
25  
29  
23  
27  
31  
53  
57  
61  
55  
59  
63  
OUTPUTS  
1
2
3
4
17  
18  
19  
20  
33  
34  
35  
36  
49  
50  
51  
52  
RESET  
3.0A MAX  
5
9
6
7
8
21  
22  
26  
23  
27  
24  
37  
41  
38  
39  
43  
40  
44  
53  
57  
54  
58  
55  
56  
10  
11  
12  
25  
28  
42  
59  
60  
64  
EXT  
BME  
SYNC  
BME COMM  
ADDRESS LAN  
13  
14  
15  
16  
29  
30  
31  
32  
45  
46  
47  
48  
61  
62  
63  
-
4
+
L
ISTED  
1
T23  
C
U S  
.T.E.  
L
ISTED  
I
1
T23  
C
U S  
I.T.E.  
ACT LINK  
IN  
OUT  
Video and Sync  
Audio  
Control  
Figure 1-1 — CrossPoint 450 Plus / MAV Plus application  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Introduction  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-3  
Introduction, cont’d  
A low resolution video matrix switcher system requires a MAV Plus Video BME for  
each video plane (three BMEs for component video, two BMEs for S-video, or one  
BME for composite video). To add audio to the system requires a MAV Plus Stereo  
or Mono Audio BME.  
Multiple QS-FPCs are unnecessary and potentially confusing. To avoid  
confusion, Extron recommends that you lock the redundant QS-FPCs. See  
Locking out the front panel (Executive mode) on page 3-40.  
N
The matrix switchers are solutions to complex wideband or low resolution video  
and/or audio routing applications. Each input and output is individually isolated  
and buffered, and any input(s) can be switched to any one or all outputs with  
virtually no crosstalk or signal noise between channels.  
The audio BMEs input and output audio on 3.5 mm, 5-pole (stereo BME) or 3-pole  
(mono BME) captive screw terminals.  
For matrix switcher systems with video and audio BMEs, the audio switching can  
either be linked with the video (audio follow) or independent of the video (audio  
breakaway). Adjustable input audio gain and attenuation compensates for level  
differences between audio inputs.  
The matrix switcher system can be remotely controlled via its local area network  
(LAN) Ethernet port and/or RS-232/RS-422 port on the rear of the primary BME  
(BME 0). The matrix switchers are programmed with Extron’s Simple Instruction  
Set™ (SIS™), a set of basic ASCII code commands that provide simple control  
through a control system or PC without programming long, obscure strings of code.  
SIS commands can be entered via either the Ethernet link or the RS-232/RS-422  
link.  
The LAN port can be connected through a LAN or wide area network (WAN).  
The switchers feature e-mail notification of maintenance or other concerned  
personnel concerning the status of the power supplies and the loss or resumption of  
sync on individual inputs.  
The RS-232/RS-422 port can be connected to a control system, a PC, or any of the  
Extron remote control panels, such as the MKP 2000 or MKP 3000.  
The matrix switchers are housed in rack-mountable, metal enclosures with 19" rack  
ears. Each video and sync BME model is housed in a 6U enclosure. The MAV Plus  
audio BMEs are housed in a 7U enclosure. The appropriate rack mounting kit is  
included with each switcher.  
Each model has two, primary and redundant, internal 100 VAC to 240 VAC,  
50/60 Hz auto switchable power supplies that provide worldwide power  
compatibility and redundant dependability. The power supply wattages are as  
follows:  
•
•
195 watts — All MAV Plus audio BMEs  
110 watts — CrossPoint 450 Plus 64-input and 48-input video BMEs and all  
MAV Plus video BMEs  
•
•
65 watts — All CrossPoint 450 Plus sync BMEs  
50 watts — CrossPoint 450 Plus 32-input BMEs  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Introduction  
1-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Definitions  
The following terms, which apply to Extron matrix switchers, are used throughout  
this manual:  
Tie — An input-to-output connection.  
Set of ties — An input tied to two or more outputs. (An output can never be tied  
to more than one input.)  
Configuration — One or more ties or one or more sets of ties.  
Current configuration — The configuration that is currently active in the  
switcher (also called configuration 0).  
Global memory preset — A configuration that has been stored. Up to 64 global  
memory presets can be stored in memory. Preset locations are assigned to  
the input buttons and (where necessary) output buttons. All presets can be  
selected from the front panel for either saving or retrieving. When a preset is  
retrieved from memory, it becomes the current configuration. All presets are  
also accessible under RS-232/RS-422 or Ethernet control.  
Room — A subset of outputs that are logically related to each other, as  
determined by the operator. The switchers support up to 10 rooms, each of  
which can consist of from 1 to 16 outputs.  
Room memory preset — A configuration consisting of outputs in a single room  
that has been stored. When a room preset is retrieved from memory, it  
becomes the current configuration. The switchers support up to 10 presets  
per room.  
Features  
Video (video BMEs) — All switchers input and output video on BNC connectors.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus Wideband Video — These switcher BMEs input and output  
wideband RGBHV or RGBS video. They can also switch RGsB, RsGsBs,  
component/HDTV, S-video, or composite video.  
MAV Plus Low Resolution Video — These switcher BMEs input and output  
NTSC 3.58, NTSC 4.43, PAL, or SECAM video or HDTV video inputs.  
Depending on the video format of the switcher system, these switchers can  
distribute low resolution RGsB, RsGsGs, component/HDTV, S-video, or  
composite video.  
Bandwidth —  
CrossPoint 450 Plus Wideband Video — The wideband switcher BMEs provide  
a minimum of 450 MHz (-3 dB) video bandwidth, fully loaded.  
MAV Plus Low Resolution Video — The low resolution switcher BMEs provide  
a minimum of 150 MHz (-3 dB) video bandwidth, fully loaded.  
Audio inputs (audio BMEs only) —  
Stereo audio BME — Input and output balanced or unbalanced stereo audio on  
3.5 mm, 5-pole captive screw terminals.  
Mono audio BME — Input and output mono audio on 3.5 mm, 3-pole captive  
screw terminals.  
Audio input gain/attenuation (audio BMEs only) — Individual input audio  
levels can be adjusted so there are no noticeable volume differences  
between sources. Users can set the input level of audio gain or attenuation  
(-18 dB to +24 dB) via the Ethernet link, RS-232/RS-422 link, or the front  
panel.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Introduction  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-5  
Introduction, cont’d  
Audio output volume (systems with audio BMEs) — The audio volume of each  
output can be displayed and adjusted through a range of full output to  
completely silent, from the front panel or under RS-232/RS-422 or Ethernet  
control.  
Digital Sync Validation Processing (DSVP™) (CrossPoint 450 Plus Sync BMEs) —  
In critical environments or unmanned, remote locations, it may be vital to  
know that sources are active and switching. Extron’s DSVP confirms that  
input sources are active by scanning all sync inputs for active signals. DSVP  
provides instantaneous frequency feedback for composite sync or separate  
horizontal and vertical sync signals via the switcher’s RS-232/RS-422 or  
Ethernet port. The frequency information can be displayed on any control  
system or in a Windows®-based control program on a local-area network  
(LAN) or Internet (IP) connection (figure 1-2).  
Input # 01  
Signal: PRESENT  
Sync Type: H&V  
Vertical Freq.: 60 Hz  
Horz Freq.: 31.5 kHz  
MATRIX INPUT STATUS  
Input # 01  
Signal: PRESENT  
Sync Type: H&V  
Input # 02  
Signal: PRESENT  
Sync Type: H&V  
Input # 03  
Signal: PRESENT  
Sync Type: H&V  
Input # 04  
Signal: PRESENT  
Sync Type: H&V  
Vertical Freq.: 60 Hz  
Horz Freq.: 31.5 kHz  
Vertical Freq.: 60 Hz  
Horz Freq.: 31.5 kHz  
Vertical Freq.: 60 Hz  
Horz Freq.: 31.5 kHz  
Vertical Freq.: 60 Hz  
Horz Freq.: 31.5 kHz  
Input # 05  
Signal: PRESENT  
Sync Type: H&V  
Input # 06  
Signal: PRESENT  
Sync Type: H&V  
Input # 07  
Signal: PRESENT  
Sync Type: H&V  
Input # 08  
Signal: PRESENT  
Sync Type: H&V  
Vertical Freq.: 60 Hz  
Horz Freq.: 31.5 kHz  
Vertical Freq.: 60 Hz  
Horz Freq.: 31.5 kHz  
Vertical Freq.: 60 Hz  
Horz Freq.: 31.5 kHz  
Vertical Freq.: 60 Hz  
Horz Freq.: 31.5 kHz  
Input Horz. Vert.  
Input # 09  
Signal: PRESENT  
Sync Type: H&V  
Input # 10  
Signal: PRESENT  
Sync Type: H&V  
Input # 11  
Signal: PRESENT  
Sync Type: H&V  
Input # 12  
Signal: PRESENT  
Sync Type: H&V  
Vertical Freq.: 60 Hz  
Horz Freq.: 31.5 kHz  
Vertical Freq.: 60 Hz  
Horz Freq.: 31.5 kHz  
Vertical Freq.: 60 Hz  
Horz Freq.: 31.5 kHz  
Vertical Freq.: 60 Hz  
Horz Freq.: 31.5 kHz  
01 31.50 60.00  
02 31.50 60.00  
03 31.50 60.00  
04 48.01 67.50  
05 48.01 67.50  
06 48.01 67.50  
07 48.01 67.50  
08 61.55 72.00  
09 61.55 72.00  
10 61.55 72.00  
11 61.55 72.00  
12 61.55 72.00  
Sample control system panel  
OR  
Windows-based control program  
Figure 1-2 — DSVP data display  
RGB Delay (CrossPoint 450 Plus Sync BMEs) — A switcher that includes a  
CrossPoint 450 Plus Sync BME can briefly blank the RGB (video) output  
while it switches to the new input’s sync source, and then switches the RGB  
signals. This allows a brief delay for the display to adjust to the selected  
input’s sync timing before displaying the new picture, which will appear  
without glitches. RGB delay, also known as Triple-Action Switching™ or  
video mute switching, is user selectable from 0 to 5 seconds, in half-second  
increments.  
Rooming — Each switcher can be programmed to group multiple outputs to  
specific “rooms”, allowing them to have their own presets.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Introduction  
1-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Switching flexibility — Provides individually buffered, independent matrix  
switched outputs with audio follow and audio breakaway for systems with  
audio BMEs.  
•
•
Tie any input to any or all outputs  
Quick multiple tie — Multiple inputs can be switched to multiple outputs  
simultaneously. This allows all displays (outputs) to change from source to  
source at the same time.  
•
•
Audio follow — Audio can be switched with its corresponding video input  
via front panel control or under Ethernet or RS-232/RS-422 remote control.  
Audio breakaway — Audio can be broken away from its corresponding  
video signal. This feature allows any audio signal to be selected with any  
video signal simultaneously to one or all outputs in any combination. Audio  
breakaway switching can be done via front panel control or under Ethernet or  
RS-232/RS-422 remote control.  
Operational flexibility — Operations such as input/output selection, setting of  
presets, and adjustment of audio levels can be performed on the front panel  
or via the Ethernet or RS-232/RS-422 link. The Ethernet and RS-232/RS-422  
links allow remote control via a PC or control system. The Ethernet link  
allows multiple remote links with two levels of password protection.  
•
QuickSwitch-Front Panel Controller (QS-FPC) — The optional front panel  
controller supports input and output selection, I/O grouping, preset creation  
and selection, RGB delay, and audio gain and attenuation, and volume  
control (systems with audio BMEs). The front panel features illuminated  
pushbuttons that can be labeled with text or graphics.  
The front panel controller is standard, not optional, on MAV Plus video BMEs.  
In systems with multiple BMEs, all are operational, but there may be a delay in  
reporting configuration. To prevent confusion, Extron recommend locking the  
front panels of all BMEs with the exception of BME 0.  
N
A front panel controller cannot be installed on a sync or audio BME. See  
Locking out the front panel (Executive mode) on page 3-40.  
•
Windows-based control program — For RS-232/RS-422 remote control  
from a PC, the Extron Windows-based control software provides a graphical  
interface and drag-and-drop/point-and-click operation. The Windows-based  
control program also has an emulation mode that lets you create a switcher  
configuration file at the home office and then download it for use by the  
switcher on site.  
•
•
Simple Instruction Set (SIS™) — The remote control protocol uses Extron’s  
SIS for easy programming and operation.  
Remote control panels and keypads — The matrix switchers are remote  
controllable, using the optional MKP 2000 and MKP 3000 remote control  
panels. The remote control devices are easy to use and provide tactile buttons  
for quick selection. Each MKP can be used for input-to-output switching,  
one-touch switching for a particular output. The MKP 3000 also can be used  
for selection of global presets.  
Upgradeable firmware — The firmware that controls all switcher operation can  
be upgraded in the field via RS-232/RS-422 or Ethernet, without taking the  
switcher out of service. Firmware upgrades are available for download on  
the Extron Web site, www.extron.com, and they can be installed using the  
Windows-based control program or the built-in HTML pages.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Introduction  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-7  
Introduction, cont’d  
Labeling — Extron’s included button label software lets you create labels to place  
in the front panel I/O buttons, with names, alphanumeric characters, or color  
bitmaps for easy and intuitive input and output selection. Alternatively,  
labels can be made with any Brother™ P-Touch™ or comparable labeler.  
Global memory presets — 64 global memory presets are a time-saving feature that  
lets you set up and store input/output configurations in advance. You can  
then recall those configurations, when needed, with a few simple steps.  
Rack mounting — Rack mountable in any conventional 19” wide rack.  
Front panel security lockout (Executive mode) — If a matrix switcher BME with  
a QS-FPC is installed in an open area where operation by unauthorized  
personnel may be a problem, a security lockout feature can be implemented.  
When the front panel is locked, a special button combination or SIS command  
is required to unlock the front panel controller before it can be operated.  
I/O grouping — Allows the matrix to be virtually divided into smaller  
sub-switchers, making installation and control easier. I/O grouping allows  
specific inputs and outputs, such as those designated for a specific purpose,  
to be grouped together. I/O grouping limits the selection of inputs and  
outputs to members of the same group.  
Primary and redundant power supplies — Includes two internal 100 VAC  
to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, auto-switchable power supplies, which provide  
worldwide power compatibility.  
The power supply circuitry is configured to automatically switch over from  
the primary supply to the hot redundant supply in the case of a failure.  
The hot redundant power supply means high reliability for the system and  
no loss of functionality should the primary supply fail; the redundant power  
supply immediately assumes the load.  
Power supply status LEDs — Front panel LEDs indicate the status of the primary  
and redundant power supplies.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Introduction  
1-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers  
Chapter Two  
2
Installation  
Mounting the Switcher  
Rear Panel Views  
Front Panel Configuration Port  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation  
Mounting the Switcher  
The matrix switcher BMEs are housed in rack-mountable, 6U (sync and video BMEs)  
or 7U (audio BMEs) high metal enclosures with 19" rack ears. If desired, rack  
mount the switcher BME as follows:  
1.  
Insert the switcher BME into the rack, aligning the holes in the mounting  
bracket with those in the rack.  
2.  
Secure the switcher BME to the rack using the supplied bolts.  
Rear Panel Views  
All connectors for all switcher BMEs are on the rear panel. Figure 2-1 shows a  
CrossPoint 450 Plus 6464 Sync BME, which has a feature set similar to all of the  
features of all of the video and sync switcher BMEs with the following exceptions:  
•
•
The Sync Termination DIP switches ( ) are found on the sync BME only.  
c
The External Sync BNC connection ( ) is found on the MAV Plus and  
k
CrossPoint 450 Plus video BMEs only.  
Figure 2-2 shows a MAV Plus 6464 Stereo Audio BME.  
Use electrostatic discharge precautions (be electrically grounded)  
C
when making connections. Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage  
equipment, even if you cannot feel, see, or hear it.  
Remove system power before making all connections.  
C
The 3248, 3264, 4832, 4848, 4864, 6432, 6448 matrix sizes are housed in the  
same enclosure, but have fewer input and output connectors to accommodate  
their smaller matrix sizes.  
N
3
1
ANAHEIM, CA  
OUTPUTS 1 - 16  
OUTPUTS 33 - 48  
1
5
2
3
4
8
33  
37  
41  
45  
34  
38  
42  
46  
35  
39  
43  
47  
36  
40  
44  
48  
INPUTS  
4
1
9
2
3
5
6
7
8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8  
10 12 14 16  
75  
6
7
510  
10  
18  
26  
34  
42  
50  
58  
11  
19  
27  
35  
43  
51  
59  
12  
20  
28  
36  
44  
52  
60  
13  
21  
29  
37  
45  
53  
61  
14  
22  
30  
38  
46  
54  
62  
15  
23  
31  
39  
47  
55  
63  
16  
24  
32  
40  
48  
56  
64  
9
11 13 15  
75  
9
10  
14  
11  
15  
12  
16  
510  
17  
25  
33  
41  
49  
57  
13  
2
2
OUTPUTS 17 - 32  
OUTPUTS 49 - 64  
17  
21  
25  
29  
18  
22  
26  
30  
19  
23  
27  
31  
20  
24  
28  
32  
49  
53  
57  
61  
50  
54  
58  
62  
51  
55  
59  
63  
52  
56  
60  
64  
REMOTE  
BME  
ADDRESS  
12  
EXT  
SYNC  
LAN  
BME COMM  
Tx  
-
Tx  
Rx  
Rx  
4
LISTED  
+
1T23  
I.T.E.  
8
C
U S  
RESET  
ACT LINK  
IN  
OUT  
11  
7
6
9
10  
Figure 2-1 — CrossPoint 450 Plus / MAV Plus 6464 sync or video matrix  
switcher BME  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Installation  
2-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
8
10  
9
6
12  
7
C
5
Figure 2-2 — MAV Plus 6464 Stereo Audio BME  
Video or sync input and output (video and sync BMEs)  
The switchers do not alter the input video or sync signal in any way. The signal  
output by the BME is in the same format as the input.  
N
The switcher can connect to up to as many as 64 video sources, depending on the  
model. The switcher can output to as many as 64 video devices, depending on the  
model.  
Each video plane (such as red, green, or blue) or sync plane (such as horizontal  
sync and vertical sync) requires its own BME of the appropriate type:  
N
Red, green, and blue video planes — Connect these planes to  
CrossPoint 450 Plus Wideband video BMEs.  
Horizontal sync, vertical sync, and composite sync — Connect these planes  
to CrossPoint 450 Plus Sync BMEs.  
Y, R-Y, B-Y [component video], Y, C [S-video], or video [composite video] —  
Connect these planes to MAV Plus Low Resolution video BMEs.  
Video or sync inputs — Connect a single plane of video or sync, as  
a
b
appropriate to the BME type, to these BNC connectors for each input.  
Video or sync outputs — Connect a single plane of video or sync, as  
appropriate to the BME type to these BNC connectors for each output.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Installation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-3  
Installation, cont’d  
Sync termination switches (systems with sync BMEs)  
Sync termination switches — The CrossPoint 450 Plus Sync  
matrix switcher BMEs have sync termination switches on  
the rear panel for inputs 1 through 16. The switches provide  
a way to condition non-TTL sync levels greater than 5 Vp-p,  
enabling the sync to be properly passed from input to  
selected output(s).  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8  
c
75  
510  
10 12 14 16  
9 11 13 15  
75  
Each switch provides the option of selecting either 510 ohms  
or 75 ohms. The 75 ohms position is required only for an  
input with non-TTL sync, greater than 5 V p-p. The normal  
position is 510 ohms.  
510  
An input that produces an out of sync display, a display that is rolling vertically  
and/or tearing horizontally, could indicate a non-TTL sync input.  
N
A device that is known to output non-TTL sync levels (greater than 5V p-p)  
should be connected to one of the inputs with sync termination switches, and the  
switches for that input should be set to the 75 ohm position. If you are not sure,  
check the specifications in the user’s manual for the input device.  
Audio input and output (systems wtih audio BMEs)  
Figure 2-2 shows a MAV Plus 6464 Stereo audio BME. The mono audio BME  
looks similar, but with 3-pole captive screw connectors rather than the 5-pole  
connectors shown.  
N
By default, the audio ties follow the video ties. Audio breakaway, which can be  
activated via the optional front panel or under Ethernet or RS-232/RS-422 control,  
allows you to select from any one of the audio input sources and route it separately  
from its corresponding video source. See chapter 3, Operation, chapter 4, SIS  
Programming and Control, chapter 5, Matrix Software, and chapter 6, HTML Operation  
for details.  
Connections for balanced and unbalanced audio inputs — Each input has a  
d
3.5 mm, 5-pole (stereo audio BME) or 3-pole (mono audio BME) captive screw  
connector for balanced or unbalanced stereo or mono (depending on the  
BME) audio input. Connectors are included with each switcher, but you must  
supply the audio cable.  
See figure 2-3 to wire a connector on a stereo audio BME for the appropriate  
input type and impedance level.  
Tip  
Ring  
Sleeve (s)  
Tip  
Tip  
Sleeve  
Tip  
Sleeve  
Ring  
0.2” (5 mm) max.  
Do not tin the wires!  
Balanced Stereo Input  
Unbalanced Stereo Input  
(high impedance)  
(high impedance)  
Figure 2-3 — Captive screw connector wiring for stereo audio inputs  
On stereo audio BMEs, the captive screw audio connector can easily be  
inadvertently plugged partially into one receptacle and partially into an  
adjacent receptacle. This misconnection could damage the audio circuits.  
Ensure that the connector is plugged fully and only into the desired input  
or output.  
C
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Installation  
2-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See figure 2-4 to wire a connector on a mono audio BME.  
Tip  
Ring  
Sleeves  
0.2” (5 mm) max.  
Do not tin the wires!  
Figure 2-4 — Captive screw connector wiring for mono audio inputs  
The length of exposed wires is critical. The ideal length is 0.2” (5 mm).  
N
N
•
If the stripped section of wire is longer than 0.2”, the exposed wires may  
touch, causing a short circuit between them.  
•
If the stripped section of wire is shorter than 0.2”, wires can be easily pulled  
out even if tightly fastened by the captive screws.  
See figure 2-5 to identify the tip, ring, and sleeve when you are making  
connections for the switcher from existing audio cables. A mono audio connector  
consists of the tip and sleeve. A stereo audio connector consists of the tip, ring  
and sleeve. The ring, tip, and sleeve wires are also shown on the captive screw  
audio connector diagrams, figure 2-3, figure 2-4, figure 2-6, and figure 2-7.  
Tip (+)  
Tip (+)  
Ring (-)  
Sleeve (  
)
Sleeve (  
)
3.5 mm Stereo Plug Connector  
RCA Connector  
(balanced)  
Figure 2-5 — Typical audio connectors  
The audio level for each input can be individually set via the front panel  
or Ethernet or RS-232/RS-422 control to ensure that the level on the output  
does not vary from input to input. See chapter 3, Operation, chapter 4,  
SIS Programming and Control, chapter 5, Matrix Software, and chapter 6,  
HTML Operation for details.  
Connections for balanced and unbalanced audio outputs — These 3.5 mm,  
e
5-pole (stereo audio BMEs) or 3-pole (mono audio BMEs) captive screw  
connectors output the selected unamplified, line level audio. Connect audio  
devices, such as an audio amplifier or powered speakers.  
See figure 2-6 to properly wire an output connector for the stereo audio BME.  
Tip  
Tip  
Ring  
Left  
Left  
NO GROUND HERE.  
Sleeve(s)  
Tip  
Tip  
Ring  
Right  
Right  
NO GROUND HERE.  
0.2” (5 mm) max.  
Do not tin the wires!  
Unbalanced Stereo Output  
Balanced Stereo Output  
Figure 2-6 — Captive screw connector wiring for stereo audio output  
Connect the sleeve to ground (Gnd). Connecting the sleeve to a  
negative (-) terminal will damage the audio output circuits.  
C
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Installation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-5  
Installation, cont’d  
See figure 2-7 to properly wire an output connector for the mono audio BME.  
Tip  
Ring  
Sleeves  
0.2” (5 mm) max.  
Do not tin the wires!  
Figure 2-7 — Captive screw connector wiring for mono audio output  
The length of exposed wires is critical. The ideal length is 0.2” (5 mm).  
N
•
If the stripped section of wire is longer than 0.2”, the exposed wires may  
touch, causing a short circuit between them.  
•
If the stripped section of wire is shorter than 0.2”, wires can be easily pulled  
out even if tightly fastened by the captive screws.  
The volume level for each output can be individually set via the front panel  
or Ether net or RS-232/RS-422 control. See chapter 3, Operation, chapter 4,  
SIS Programming and Control, chapter 5, Matrix Software, and chapter 6,  
HTML Operation for details.  
BME connection and selection  
BME 0 should house the front panel controller and be the BME used for system  
control and monitoring via the serial ports and Ethernet LAN link.  
N
BME address switch — Each BME must be set to a unique address of 0  
through 5.  
f
Addresses 6 through 9 are invalid.  
The addresses used in the system must be sequential with no skipped  
numbers.  
Sync BMEs cannot be set to address 0.  
To set the BME address, press the + and - buttons on the BME Address switch  
on the rear panel of the switcher (figure 2-8).  
64  
63  
62  
61  
TE  
REMO  
Tx  
LAN  
Rx  
61  
62  
63  
64  
BME  
S
ADDRES  
4
COMM  
LINK  
BME  
T
AC  
EXT  
REMOTE  
BME  
ADDRESS  
EXT  
SYNC  
LAN  
BME COMM  
SYN
Tx  
OUT  
-
Tx  
Rx  
Rx  
4
+
8
RESET  
ACT LINK  
IN  
OUT  
4
11  
7
6
9
10  
Figure 2-8 — Setting a BME address (video BME shown)  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Installation  
2-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BME COMM interconnect ports — If the matrix switcher system consists of  
more than one BME, the BMEs must be connected together in a daisy chain  
using Extron-supplied RJ-45 cables.  
g
Connect the first daisy chain from BME 0’s BME Comm Out connector to  
the nearest BME’s BME Comm In connector (figure 2-9). In a rack where  
BMEs are arranged so that their physical location matches the BME address  
numbering, this would be BME 1. But since not all systems are configured  
alike, call this module BME n.  
64  
63  
62  
61  
TE  
REMO  
Tx  
LAN  
Rx  
BME  
S
RES  
ADD  
RESET  
K
4
COMM  
LIN  
BME  
T
AC  
61  
62  
63  
64  
EXT  
SYNC  
OUT  
REMOTE  
BME  
ADDRESS  
EXT  
SYNC  
LAN  
BME COMM  
From BME  
Tx  
-
Tx  
Rx  
Rx  
4
+
8
RESET  
ACT LINK  
IN  
OUT  
To BME  
11  
7
6
9
10  
Figure 2-9 — Daisy-chaining BMEs (video BME shown)  
Connect the next RJ-45 cable from BME n’s BME Comm Out connector to the  
nearest unconnected BME’s (BME n+1’s) BME Comm In connector.  
Continue connecting RJ-45 cables from each daisy-chained module’s BME  
Comm Out connector to the next module’s BME Comm In connector until  
all modules are included in the chain. When all of the BMEs are connected,  
each of the BMEs in the system is connected to at least one other BME via the  
BME Comm connectors.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Installation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-7  
Installation, cont’d  
RS-232/RS-422  
RS-232/RS-422 connector — Connect a host device, such as a computer,  
h
touch panel control, or RS-232 capable PDA to the switcher via this 9-pin D  
connector on BME 0 only for serial RS-232/RS-422 control (figure 2-10).  
Pin RS-232Function  
RS-422 Function  
Not used  
TX– Transmit data (–)  
RX– Receive data (–)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
—
Not used  
—
1
5
TX Transmit data  
RX Receive data  
—
6
9
Not used  
—
Not used  
Gnd Signal ground Gnd Signal ground  
—
—
—
—
Not used  
Not used  
Not used  
Not used  
—
Not used  
RX+ Receive data (+)  
TX+ Transmit data (+)  
—
Not used  
Figure 2-10 — RS-232/RS-422 connector  
See chapter 4, SIS Programming and Control, for definitions of the SIS  
commands (serial commands to control the switcher via this connector) and  
chapter 5, Matrix Software for details on how to install and use the control  
software.  
The switcher can support either the RS-232 or RS-422 serial communication  
protocol, and operate at 9600, 19200, 38400, or 115200 baud rates.  
N
See Selecting the rear panel Remote port protocol and baud rate in  
chapter 3, Operation, to configure the RS-232/RS-422 port from the front panel.  
If desired, connect an MKP 2000 or MKP 3000 remote control panel to the  
switcher’s RS-232/RS-422 connector. Refer to the MKP 2000 Remote Control  
Panel User’s Manual or the MKP 3000 Remote Control Panel User’s Manual for  
details.  
Ethernet  
Ethernet port — If desired, for IP control of the system, connect  
the matrix switcher to a PC or to an Ethernet LAN, via this  
RJ-45 connector on BME 0 only. You can use a PC to control the  
i
networked switcher with SIS commands from anywhere in the  
world. You can also control the switcher from a PC that is either  
running Extron’s windows-based control program or that has  
downloaded HTML pages from the switcher.  
Link  
LED  
Activity  
LED  
Ethernet connection indicators — The Link and Act LEDs indicate the status  
of the Ethernet connection. The Link LED indicates that the switcher is  
properly connected to an Ethernet LAN. This LED should light steadily. The  
Act LED indicates transmission of data packets on the RJ-45 connector. This  
LED should flicker as the switcher communicates.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Installation  
2-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cabling and RJ-45 connector wiring  
It is vital that your Ethernet cables be the correct cables, and that they be properly  
terminated with the correct pinout. Fast Ethernet links use Category (CAT) 5e  
or CAT 6, unshielded twisted pair (UTP) or shielded twisted pair (STP) cables,  
terminated with RJ-45 connectors. Ethernet cables are limited to a length 328' (100 m).  
Do not use standard telephone cables. Telephone cables will not support  
Ethernet or Fast Ethernet.  
N
Do not stretch or bend cables. Transmission errors can occur.  
The cable used depends on your network speed. The switcher supports both  
10 Mbps (10Base-T — Ethernet) and 100 Mbps (100Base-T — Fast Ethernet),  
half-duplex and full-duplex, Ethernet connections.  
•
•
10Base-T Ethernet requires CAT 3 UTP or STP cable at minimum.  
100Base-T Fast Ethernet requires CAT 5e UTP or STP cable at minimum.  
The Ethernet cable can be terminated as a straight-through cable or a crossover  
cable and must be properly terminated for your application (figure 2-11).  
•
Crossover cable — Direct connection between the computer and the  
matrix switcher BME 0.  
•
Patch (straight) cable — Connection of the matrix switcher BME 0 to an  
Ethernet LAN.  
Patch (straight) cable  
Side 1  
Side 2  
Pin  
1
Wire color  
Pin  
1
Wire color  
White-orange  
Orange  
White-orange  
Orange  
Side  
Clip Down  
2
2
Pins 12345678  
RJ-45  
3
White-green  
Blue  
3
White-green  
Blue  
connector  
4
4
5
White-blue  
Green  
5
White-blue  
Green  
6
6
7
White-brown  
Brown  
7
White-brown  
Brown  
8
8
12345678  
Crossover cable  
Side 1  
Side 2  
Pin  
1
Wire color  
White-orange  
Orange  
Pin  
1
Wire color  
White-green  
Green  
Twisted  
Pairs  
2
2
3
White-green  
Blue  
3
White-orange  
Blue  
1&2  
7&8  
4
4
3&6 4&5  
5
White-blue  
Green  
5
White-blue  
Orange  
6
6
7
White-brown  
Brown  
7
White-brown  
Brown  
8
8
Figure 2-11 — RJ-45 connector and pinout tables  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Installation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-9  
Installation, cont’d  
Reset button  
Reset button — The Reset button initiates four  
j
levels of reset to the matrix switcher. Press and  
hold the button while the switcher is running or  
while you power up the switcher for different reset  
levels.  
Rx  
RESET  
See Performing soft system resets in chapter 3,  
Operation, for details.  
•
Events (mode 3) reset — Hold Reset for 3 seconds then release and push  
again to toggle events monitoring on and off.  
•
IP settings (mode 4) reset — Hold Reset for 6 seconds then release and  
push again to reset the switcher’s IP functions.  
IP settings reset does not replace any user-installed firmware.  
N
•
Absolute (mode 5) reset — Hold Reset for 9 seconds then release and  
push again to restore the switcher to the default factory settings.  
•
Hard reset — Hold Reset while powering up the switcher to restore the  
switcher to the default base firmware, user settings, and files.  
Hard reset does not clear the current configuration.  
N
External sync (systems with MAV Plus Video BMEs)  
The MAV Plus Video switcher BME switches between inputs during the vertical  
interval period, resulting in glitch-free video switching. The MAV switcher can use  
an external signal to synchronize switching during the vertical interval. Without  
the external sync locking feature, switching between inputs can result in a brief  
rolling (sync loss) or a brief change in the picture size.  
Ext(ernal) Sync connector — Connect an external sync signal to this BNC  
connection on BNC 0 for genlocking the video signal in broadcast or other  
sync-critical applications.  
k
In systems with multiple low resolution video BMEs (such as component video  
and S-video systems), only the External Sync connector on the luminance (Y)  
video plane’s BME needs to be connected to the black burst generator. This BME  
should be BME 0  
N
Figure 2-12 shows a basic external sync configuration. The Ext Sync connector  
receives the timing signal. A tee connector on the connector allows the  
signal to be passed on to another video device, if required. Terminate the tee  
connector if desired.  
Figure 2-13 shows another configuration, in which the timing source passes  
through three video cameras and a video scan converter before connecting  
to the switcher. This type of video camera can synchronize with the external  
timing source for video editing applications.  
If no external sync timing source is connected to the switcher, switching  
occurs immediately.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Installation  
2-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Extron  
BBG 6 A  
Black Burst Color Bar  
Audio Generator  
OUT  
Connect to  
MAV Plus 6464.  
Tee-connector  
Terminate cable or  
connect to another device.  
Extron  
MAV Plus 6464  
Matrix Switcher  
Figure 2-12 — Simple external sync connection example  
VGA Input  
Extron  
VSC 900D  
Monitor  
Computer-to-Video  
Scan Converter  
VCR  
Extron  
MAV Plus 6464  
Matrix Switcher  
Extron  
BBG 6 A  
32  
22  
IN  
-2  
/4  
S
R
G
E
N
L
O
C
K
Black Burst/Color Bar/  
Audio Generator  
D1  
O
E
ID  
V
D
S-VI  
V
-Y  
/H  
H
-Y  
/B  
B
/Y  
G
O
U
T
-Y  
/R  
R
P
U
T
V
S
H
V
/H  
B
2
-Y  
/B  
/
G
/Y  
Y
R
-Y  
-
/R  
B
-Y  
B/R  
1
I
3A  
N
P
U
T
100-240V  
0.  
R
S
5
0
/
6
0
H
z
UTION AMPLIFIER  
DISTRIB  
Video Camera  
Video Camera  
Video Camera  
Figure 2-13 — Multiple device external sync connection example  
Power  
AC power connector — Plug a standard IEC power cord into this connector to  
connect the switcher to a 100 VAC to 240 VAC, 50 or 60 Hz power source.  
l
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Installation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-11  
Installation, cont’d  
Front Panel Configuration Port  
Configuration port — This 2.5 mm mini stereo jack (figure 2-14) serves the  
m
same serial communications function as the rear panel Remote port, but it  
may easier to access. The optional 9-pin D to 2.5 mm stereo mini TRS RS-232  
cable, part #70-335-01 (figure 2-15) can be used for this connection.  
I/O  
CONTROL  
ESC  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
POWER SUPPLY  
I/O CONFIG  
PRIMARY  
REDUNDANT  
CROSSPOINT 450 PLUS SERIES  
ULTRA WIDEBAND MATRIX SWITCHER  
13  
Figure 2-14 — Front panel configuration port  
6 feet  
(1.8 m)  
Part #70-335-01  
1
6
9
5
Tip  
Ring  
Sleeve (Gnd)  
9-pin D  
Connection  
TRS Plug  
Pin 2  
Pin 3  
Pin 5  
Computer's RX line  
Computer's TX line  
Computer's signal ground  
Tip  
Ring  
Sleeve  
Figure 2-15 — Optional 9-pin TRS RS-232 cable  
The maximum distances from the matrix switcher to the controlling device can  
vary up to 200' (61 m). Factors such as cable gauge, baud rates, environment,  
and output levels (from the switcher and the controlling device) all affect  
transmission distance. Distances of about 50' (15 m) are typically not a problem.  
In some cases the matrix switcher may be capable of serial communications via  
RS-232 up to 250' (76 m) away.  
N
This port is completely separate from the rear panel Remote port and is not  
affected by changes to the rear panel port’s protocol. This front panel port’s  
protocol can be changed, under SIS command control only.  
N
This port is RS-232 only, with its default protocols as follows:  
• 9600 baud  
• 1 stop bit  
• no parity  
• no flow control  
• 8-bit  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Installation  
2-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers  
Chapter Three  
3
Operation  
Front Panel Controls and Indicators  
QS-FPC Front Panel Operations  
Rear Panel Controls  
Optimizing the Audio (Systems with Audio BMEs)  
Troubleshooting  
Configuration Worksheets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation  
The operation of the CrossPoint 450 Plus switcher BMEs and MAV Plus  
switcher BMEs is very similar. There are two exceptions:  
N
•
The video selection button is labeled “RGBHV” on the CrossPoint 450 Plus  
switcher BMEs and “Video” on the MAV Plus switcher BMEs. Throughout  
this manual, the terms “RGBHV button” and “Video button” can be used  
interchangeably.  
•
The MAV Plus switcher BMEs do not offer RGB delay switching.  
Some models are equipped with an integrated Quick Switch-Front Panel  
Controller (QS-FPC™):  
N
•
The CrossPoint 450 Plus Video BME is available with or without a QS-FPC.  
The MAV Plus video BME is always equipped with a QS-FPC.  
•
•
•
•
The CrossPoint 450 Plus Sync BME is not available with a QS-FPC.  
The MAV Plus audio BME (stereo or mono) is not available with a QS-FPC.  
BMEs without a QS-FPC are equipped with a blank front panel.  
The BME with the operational front panel controller should be BME 0.  
N
N
Multiple QS-FPCs are unnecessary and potentially confusing. An S-video  
or component video system has has multiple QS-FPCs by default. To avoid  
confusion, Extron recommends that you lock the redundant QS-FPCs. See  
Locking out the front panel (Executive mode) on page 3-40.  
Front Panel Controls and Indicators  
The QS-FPC front panel controls (figure 3-1) are grouped into two sets. The input  
and output buttons are grouped on the left side of the panel. The control buttons  
and video/audio (I/O) selection buttons are grouped on the right side of the panel.  
While the number of inputs and outputs varies depending on the size of the  
matrix, all of the switchers in this family have the same 64 input buttons by  
64 output buttons front panel arrangement (figure 3-1).  
N
On switchers with a smaller matrix size, the higher-numbered buttons do not  
select inputs and outputs, although they are used to select and indicate preset  
numbers, indicate the input audio level, and indicate the output audio volume.  
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
27 28 29 30 31 32  
I
24 25  
17 18 19 20 21 22 23  
26  
N
P
U
T
S
1
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46  
48  
64  
47  
63  
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58  
60 61 62  
59  
I/O  
CONTROL  
ESC  
VIEW  
AUDIO  
ENTER  
PRESET  
VIDEO  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
POWER SUPPLY  
I/O CONFIG  
O
PRIMARY  
24 25  
27 28 29 30 31 32  
26  
U
T
P
U
T
S
17 18 19 20 21 22 23  
9
REDUNDANT  
2
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46  
48  
64  
47  
63  
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58  
60 61 62  
59  
CROSSPOINT 450 PLUS SERIES  
ULTRA-WIDEBAND MATRIX SWITCHER  
Figure 3-1 — CrossPoint 450 Plus 6464 series with integrated QS-FPC  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation  
3-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The large, illuminated push buttons can be labeled with text and/or graphics.  
The buttons can be set to provide amber background illumination all the time or  
the background illumination can be turned off (see Background illumination, on  
page 3-41. The buttons blink or are lit at full intensity (depending on the operation)  
when selected.  
Definitions  
The following terms, which apply to Extron matrix switchers, are used throughout  
this manual:  
Tie — An input-to-output connection.  
Set of ties — An input tied to two or more outputs. (An output can never be tied  
to more than one input.)  
Configuration — One or more ties or one or more sets of ties.  
Current configuration — The configuration that is currently active in the  
switcher (also called configuration 0)  
Global memory preset — A configuration that has been stored. Up to 64 global  
memory presets can be stored in memory. Preset locations are assigned to  
the input buttons and (where necessary) output buttons. All presets can be  
selected from the front panel for either saving or retrieving. When a preset is  
retrieved from memory, it becomes the current configuration. All presets are  
also accessible under RS-232/RS-422 or Ethernet control.  
Room — A subset of outputs that are logically related to each other, as  
determined by the operator. The switchers support up to 10 rooms, each of  
which can consist of from 1 to 16 outputs.  
Room memory preset — A configuration consisting of outputs in a single room  
that has been stored. When a room preset is retrieved from memory, it  
becomes the current configuration. The switchers support up to 10 presets  
per room.  
Input and output buttons  
If the switcher has fewer inputs or outputs than input or output buttons, only  
the buttons for which the switcher has an input or output perform the function  
of selecting and identifying that input or output.  
N
Input buttons — The input buttons have two primary functions (•) and five  
secondary (❏) functions:  
a
•
•
❏
Select an input.  
Identify the selected input.  
(Input 1 only) With the Output 1 button, select I/O Group mode. See  
I/O grouping on page 3-20.  
❏
❏
Select a preset. See Using presets on page 3-26.  
(Systems with CrossPoint 450 Plus Wideband switcher BMEs,  
Input 1 through 10 only) Display the RGB delay. See Setting RGB delay  
(systems with wideband BMEs) on page 3-24.  
❏
❏
(Systems with audio BMEs) Display the output volume level. See Viewing  
and adjusting the output volume (systems with audio BMEs) on page 3-35.  
(Input 1 and Input 2 only) Toggle background illumination of the  
buttons on and off. See Background illumination on page 3-41.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-3  
Operation, cont’d  
Output buttons — The output buttons have two primary functions (•) and  
three secondary (❏) functions:  
b
•
•
❏
Select output(s).  
Identify the selected output(s).  
(Output 1 only) With the Input 1 button, select I/O Group mode. See  
I/O grouping on page 3-20.  
❏
❏
Mute the output. See Muting and unmuting video and/or audio outputs on  
page 3-29.  
(Systems with audio BMEs) Display the audio level of the selected input.  
See Viewing and adjusting the input audio level (systems with audio BMEs) on  
page 3-32.  
Control buttons  
Enter button — The Enter button has three primary functions (•) and five  
secondary (❏) functions:  
c
•
Save changes that you make on the front panel. To create a simple  
configuration:  
ꢀ
Specify RGBHV (CrossPoint 450 Plus switchers) or Video  
(MAV Plus switchers), Audio, or both (see I/O selection buttons  
[
g
] and [ ])  
h
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Press the desired input button (  
)
a
Press the desired output button(s) (  
)
b
Press the Enter button.  
•
•
Indicate that a potential tie has been created but not saved.  
Indicate that a global preset has been selected to be saved or recalled but  
that the preset action has not been accomplished.  
❏
❏
In the I/O Group mode, select group 1. See I/O grouping on page 3-20.  
In the I/O Group mode, indicate that group 1 is selected. See I/O grouping  
on page 3-20.  
❏
❏
❏
With the Preset, View, and Esc buttons, select Serial Port Configuration  
mode. See Selecting the rear panel Remote port protocol and baud rate on  
page 3-42.  
Select 9600 baud for the RS-232/RS-422 port in Serial Port Configuration  
mode. See Selecting the rear panel Remote port protocol and baud rate on  
page 3-42.  
Indicate that the RS-232/RS-422 port is set to 9600 baud in Serial Port  
Configuration mode. See Selecting the rear panel Remote port protocol and  
baud rate on page 3-42.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation  
3-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preset button — The Preset button has two primary functions (•) and five  
secondary (❏) functions:  
d
•
Activates Save Preset mode to save a configuration as a preset and  
Recall Preset mode to activate a previously-defined preset.  
•
Blinks when Save Preset mode is active and lights steadily when  
Recall Preset mode is active.  
❏
❏
In the I/O Group mode, select group 2. See I/O grouping on page 3-20.  
In the I/O Group mode, indicate that group 2 is selected. See I/O grouping  
on page 3-20.  
❏
❏
❏
With the Enter, View, and Esc buttons, select Serial Port Configuration  
mode. See Selecting the rear panel Remote port protocol and baud rate on  
page 3-42.  
Select 19200 baud for the RS-232/RS-422 port in Serial Port Configuration  
mode. See Selecting the rear panel Remote port protocol and baud rate on  
page 3-42.  
Indicate that the RS-232/RS-422 port is set to 19200 baud in Serial Port  
Configuration mode. See Selecting the rear panel Remote port protocol and  
baud rate on page 3-42.  
View ( ) button — The View ( ) button has two primary functions (•) and  
<
<
e
eight secondary (❏) functions:  
Select View-Only mode that displays the current configuration.  
•
View-only mode also provides a way to mute and unmute the outputs. See  
N
Muting and unmuting video and/or audio outputs on page 3-29.  
•
Indicate that View-Only mode is active.  
❏
❏
In the I/O Group mode, select group 3. See I/O grouping on page 3-20.  
In the I/O Group mode, indicate that group 3 is selected. See I/O grouping  
on page 3-20.  
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
(Systems with CrossPoint 450 Plus Wideband switcher BMEs) Decrease  
the RGB delay of switches to the selected output. See Setting RGB delay  
(systems with wideband BMEs) on page 3-24.  
(Systems with audio BMEs) Decrease the audio level of the selected  
input. See Viewing and adjusting the input audio level (systems with audio  
BMEs) on page 3-32.  
(Systems with audio BMEs) Decrease the volume of the selected output.  
See Viewing and adjusting the output volume (systems with audio BMEs) on  
page 3-35.  
With the Enter, Preset, and Esc buttons, select Serial Port Configuration  
mode. See Selecting the rear panel Remote port protocol and baud rate on  
page 3-42.  
Select 38400 baud for the RS-232/RS-422 port in Serial Port Configuration  
mode. See Selecting the rear panel Remote port protocol and baud rate on  
page 3-42.  
Indicate that the RS-232/RS-422 port is set to 38400 baud in Serial Port  
Configuration mode. See Selecting the rear panel Remote port protocol and  
baud rate on page 3-42.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-5  
Operation, cont’d  
Esc ( ) button — The Esc ( ) button has two primary functions (•) and eight  
>
>
f
secondary (❏) functions:  
•
Cancel operations or selections in progress and reset the front panel  
button indicators.  
The Esc ( ) button does not reset the current configuration, the RGBHV  
N
>
(CrossPoint 450 Plus switchers) or Video (MAV Plus video switchers) button  
and Audio selection button, any presets, or any audio gain or attenuation or  
volume settings.  
•
Flashes once to indicate that the escape function has been activated.  
❏
❏
In the I/O Group mode, select group 4. See I/O grouping on page 3-20.  
In the I/O Group mode, indicate that group 4 is selected. See I/O grouping  
on page 3-20.  
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
(Systems with CrossPoint 450 Plus Wideband switcher BMEs) Increase  
the RGB delay of switches to the selected output. See Setting RGB delay  
(systems with wideband BMEs) on page 3-24.  
(Systems with audio BMEs) Increase the audio level of the selected  
input. See Viewing and adjusting the input audio level (systems with audio  
BMEs) on page 3-32.  
(Systems with audio BMEs) Increase the volume of the selected output.  
See Viewing and adjusting the output volume (systems with audio BMEs) on  
page 3-35.  
With the Enter, Preset, and View buttons, select Serial Port Configuration  
mode. See Selecting the rear panel Remote port protocol and baud rate on  
page 3-42.  
Select 115200 baud for the RS-232/RS-422 port in Serial Port Configuration  
mode. See Selecting the rear panel Remote port protocol and baud rate on  
page 3-42.  
Indicate that the RS-232/RS-422 port is set to 115200 baud in Serial Port  
Configuration mode. See Selecting the rear panel Remote port protocol and  
baud rate on page 3-42.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation  
3-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I/O controls  
You must specify video, audio, or both when you are creating or viewing a  
configuration. This is done with the RGBHV button (CrossPoint 450 Plus  
switchers) or Video button (MAV Plus switchers) ( ) and Audio ( ) buttons.  
g
h
Throughout this manual, the terms “RGBHV button” and “Video button” can  
be used interchangeably.  
N
RGBHV (CrossPoint 450 Plus) button or Video (MAV Plus) button — The  
RGBHV (CrossPoint 450 Plus switchers) or Video (MAV Plus video switchers)  
button has two primary functions (•) and five secondary (❏) functions:  
g
•
Selects and deselects video for a configuration that is being created or  
viewed.  
•
Lights green to indicate that video is available for configuring or for  
viewing.  
❏
❏
❏
With the Audio button, toggles the front panel lock on or off. See Locking  
out the front panel (Executive mode) on page 3-40.  
With the Audio button, commands the front panel system reset. See  
Performing a system reset from the front panel on page 3-40.  
(Systems with CrossPoint 450 Plus Wideband switcher BMEs) Selects  
the RGB delay mode, in which you can set the RGB delay. See Setting  
RGB delay (systems with wideband BMEs) on page 3-24.  
❏
❏
Select the RS-232 protocol for the RS-232/RS-422 port in Serial Port  
Configuration mode. See Selecting the rear panel Remote port protocol and  
baud rate on page 3-42.  
Indicate that the RS-232/RS-422 port is set to the RS-232 protocol in Serial  
Port Configuration mode. See Selecting the rear panel Remote port protocol  
and baud rate on page 3-42.  
Audio button — The Audio button has two primary functions (•) and three  
secondary (❏) functions  
h
•
•
❏
(Systems with audio BMEs) Selects and deselects audio for a  
configuration that is being created or viewed.  
(Systems with audio BMEs) Lights to indicate that audio is available for  
configuration or viewing.  
(Systems with audio BMEs) Selects the Audio mode, in which you can  
adjust the input audio level and the output audio volume. See Viewing  
and adjusting the input audio level (systems with audio BMEs) on page 3-32  
and Viewing and adjusting the output volume (systems with audio BMEs) on  
page 3-35.  
❏
❏
❏
With the RGBHV/Video button, toggles the front panel lock on or off.  
See Locking out the front panel (Executive mode) on page 3-40.  
With the RGBHV/Video button, commands the front panel system reset.  
See Performing a system reset from the front panel on page 3-40.  
Select the RS-422 protocol for the RS-232/RS-422 port in Serial Port  
Configuration mode. See Selecting the rear panel Remote port protocol and  
baud rate on page 3-42.  
❏
Indicate that the RS-232/RS-422 port is set to the RS-422 protocol in Serial  
Port Configuration mode. See Selecting the rear panel Remote port protocol  
and baud rate on page 3-42.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-7  
Operation, cont’d  
Power indicators  
All front panels have power indicators, regardless whether they have an integrated  
QS-FPC or not (figure 3-2).  
POWER SUPPLY  
I/O CONFIG  
PRIMARY  
9
REDUNDANT  
MAV PLUS SERIES  
AUDIO MATRIX SWITCHER  
Figure 3-2 — Front panel without an integrated QS-FPC  
Primary and Redundant Power Supply LEDs —  
i
Green — Indicates that the associated power supply is operating within  
normal tolerances.  
Red — Indicates that the associated power supply is operating outside the  
normal tolerances or has failed.  
Button icons  
The numbered translucent covers on the input and output pushbuttons can be  
removed and replaced to insert labels behind the covers.  
Input and output labels can be created easily with Extron’s Button-Label Generator  
software, which ships with every Extron matrix switcher. Each input and output  
can be labeled with names, alphanumeric characters, or even color bitmaps for easy  
and intuitive input and output selection (figure 3-3). See chapter 5, Matrix Software,  
for details on using the labeling software. See Appendix B, Reference Information, for  
blank labels and a procedure for removing and replacing the translucent covers.  
I
N
P
U
T
S
10  
13  
15  
VCR  
VTG 200  
Computer  
Computer  
Document  
Camera  
28 29 30 31 32  
VD  
Figure 3-3 — Sample button icons  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation  
3-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
QS-FPC Front Panel Operations  
The following paragraphs detail the power-up process and then provide sample  
procedures for creating ties; changing a configuration; viewing configurations;  
saving and recalling a preset; muting and unmuting outputs, viewing and adjusting  
the audio level; viewing and adjusting the output volume; locking out the front  
panel; performing one of several resets; toggling background illumination on and  
off; and reading and setting the rear panel RS-232/RS-422 Remote port settings.  
Power  
Apply power by connecting the power cord to an AC source. The switcher  
performs a self-test that flashes the front panel button indicators (if so equipped)  
green, red, and amber and then turns them off. An error-free power up self-test  
sequence leaves all I/O and control buttons either unlit or showing background  
illumination. The lit/unlit status RGBHV or Video button and the Audio button is  
defined by the system configuration.  
• Systems with audio — RGBHV/Video and Audio both lit  
• Systems without audio — RGBHV/Video lit and Audio unlit  
The current configuration and all presets are saved in non-volatile memory. When  
power is applied, the most recent configuration is retrieved. The previous presets  
remain intact. BME 0, upon power up, issues a map refresh command to all slave  
BMEs to restore the current configuration.  
Because BME 0 maps the slave BMEs upon power up, either all BMEs should be  
powered up simultaneously or BME 0 should be the last BME turned on.  
Also, if any slave BME loses power, you need to issue any front panel command  
or simply cycle BME 0’s power to restore the current configuration.  
N
If an error occurs during the self-test, the switcher locks up and does not operate.  
Call the Extron S3 Sales & Technical Support Hotline.  
Creating a configuration  
Change the current configuration using the front panel buttons as follows:  
1.  
2.  
Press the Esc button to clear any input button indicators, output button  
indicators, or control button indicators that may be lit.  
Select to configure video, audio, or both by pressing the RGBHV  
(CrossPoint 450 Plus switchers) or Video (MAV Plus video switchers) button  
and/or Audio button.  
3.  
Select the desired input and output(s) by pressing the input and output buttons.  
ꢀ
Input buttons and output buttons light or blink amber to indicate video  
and audio ties, green to indicate video only ties, and red to indicate audio  
only ties.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
To indicate potential ties, output buttons blink the appropriate color  
when an input is selected.  
To indicate current ties, output buttons light steadily the appropriate  
color when an input is selected.  
To clear unwanted outputs, press and release the associated lit output  
buttons. To indicate potential unties, output buttons blink the appropriate  
color when an output is deselected but not untied from the input.  
4.  
5.  
Press and release the Enter button to accept the tie.  
Repeat steps 1 through 4 to create additional ties.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-9  
Operation, cont’d  
N
•
•
Only one video input and one audio input can be tied to an output.  
If a tie is made between an input and an output, and the selected output was  
previously tied to another input, the older tie is broken in favor of the newer  
tie.  
•
•
If an input with no tie is selected, only that input’s button lights.  
When the RGBHV (CrossPoint 450 Plus switchers) or Video (MAV Plus  
video switchers) button and Audio button are lit, if an input with an audio  
tie but no video tie is selected, the input’s button lights amber and the output  
button lights the appropriate color (amber, green, or red).  
•
•
As each input and output is selected, the associated output button blinks the  
appropriate color to indicate a tentative tie. Buttons for output(s) that were  
already tied to the input light the appropriate color steadily. Outputs that are  
already tied can be left on, along with new blinking selections, or toggled off  
by pressing the associated output button.  
If you press the input button for an I/O grouped input and then try to  
select an output in a different group, the associated output button cannot be  
selected. The associated input button remains lit.  
Example 1: Creating a set of video and audio ties  
In the following example, input 5 is tied to outputs 3, 4, and 8. The steps show the  
front panel indications that result from your actions.  
This example assumes that there are no ties in the current configuration.  
N
1.  
Press and release the Esc button (figure 3-4).  
Press the Esc button to clear all selections.  
C O N T R O L  
VIEW  
ESC  
ENTER PRESET  
The button flashes once.  
Figure 3-4 — Clear all selections  
2.  
To select video and audio for the tie, if necessary, press and release the  
RGBHV (CrossPoint 450 Plus switchers) or Video (MAV Plus video switchers)  
button and the Audio button until the buttons light (figure 3-5).  
I / O  
RGBHV AUDIO  
Press the RGBHV/Video button to toggle on and off. Press the Audio button to toggle on and off.  
The button lights green when selected. The button lights red when selected.  
Figure 3-5 — Select RGBHV or video and audio  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation  
3-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.  
Press and release the input 5 button (figure 3-6).  
Press and release the Input 5 button.  
The button lights amber to indicate that RGBHV  
and audio outputs can be tied to this input.  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9  
I
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 2N
Figure 3-6 — Select an input  
4.  
Press and release the output 3, output 4, and output 8 buttons (figure 3-7).  
The entire set of ties can be canceled at this point by pressing and releasing the  
Esc button. The Esc button flashes green once.  
N
Press and release the Output 3, Output 4, and Output 8 buttons.  
The buttons blink amber to indicate that the selected RGBHV or video and audio  
input will be tied to these outputs.  
C O N T R O L  
VIEW  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9  
ESC  
ENTER PRESET  
O
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 2U  
The Enter button blinks  
green to indicate the need to  
confirm the change.  
T
= Blinking button  
Figure 3-7 — Select the outputs  
5.  
Press and release the Enter button (figure 3-8).  
Press the Enter button to  
confirm the configuration  
change.  
ENTER  
All input buttons and output buttons  
return to unlit or background illumination.  
The Enter button returns to  
unlit or background  
illumination.  
Figure 3-8 — Press the Enter button  
The current configuration (figure 3-9) is now:  
•
Input 5 video and audio tied to output 3, output 4, and output 8  
Input 5 (video/audio) tied  
to outputs 3, 4, and 8.  
Input  
5
3
4
Output  
8
Video  
Audio  
Figure 3-9 — Example 1, final configuration  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-11  
Operation, cont’d  
Example 2: Adding a tie to a set of video and audio ties  
In the following example, a new video tie is added to the current configuration.  
The steps show the front panel indications that result from your actions.  
This example assumes that you have performed example 1.  
N
1.  
Press and release the Esc button (figure 3-10).  
Press the Esc button to clear all selections.  
C O N T R O L  
VIEW  
ESC  
ENTER PRESET  
The button flashes once.  
Figure 3-10 — Clear all selections  
2.  
To select video only for the tie, if necessary, press and release the RGBHV  
(CrossPoint 450 Plus switchers) or Video (MAV Plus video switchers) button  
and the Audio button (figure 3-11).  
I / O  
VIDEO AUDIO  
Press the RGBHV/Video button to toggle on and off. Press the Audio button to toggle on and off.  
The button lights green when selected. The button is unlit or background illuminated when deselected.  
Figure 3-11 — Select RGBHV or video only  
3.  
Press and release the input 5 button (figure 3-12).  
Press and release the Input 5 button.  
The button lights green to indicate that RGBHV or  
video outputs can be tied to or untied from this input.  
The Output 3, Output 4, and Output 8 buttons light green to  
indicate the RGBHV or video ties created in example 1.  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9  
I
O
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 2N
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 2U  
T
Figure 3-12 — Select an input  
4.  
Press and release the output 1 button (figure 3-13).  
Press and release the Output 1 button.  
The button blinks green to indicate that only the selected RGBHV  
or video input will be tied to this output.  
C O N T R O L  
VIEW  
ESC  
ENTER PRESET  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9  
The Enter button blinks  
green to indicate the need to  
confirm the change.  
O
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 2U  
T
= Blinking button  
Figure 3-13 — Select the output  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation  
3-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.  
Press and release the Enter button (figure 3-14).  
Press the Enter button to  
confirm the configuration  
change.  
ENTER  
All input buttons and output buttons  
return to unlit or background illumination.  
The Enter button returns to  
unlit or background  
illumination.  
Figure 3-14 — Press the Enter button  
The current configuration (figure 3-15) is now:  
•
•
Input 5 video tied to output 1, output 3, output 4, and output 8  
Input 5 audio tied to output 3, output 4, and output 8  
Input 5 video tied  
to outputs 1, 3, 4, and 8.  
Input 5 audio tied  
to outputs 3, 4, and 8.  
Input  
5
1
3
4
Output  
8
Video  
Audio  
Figure 3-15 — Example 2, final configuration  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-13  
Operation, cont’d  
Example 3: Removing a tie from a set of video and audio ties  
In the following example, an existing audio tie is removed from the current  
configuration. The steps show the front panel indications that result from your  
actions.  
This example assumes that you have performed example 1 and example 2.  
N
1.  
Press and release the Esc button (figure 3-16).  
Press the Esc button to clear all selections.  
C O N T R O L  
VIEW  
ESC  
ENTER PRESET  
The button flashes once.  
Figure 3-16 — Clear all selections  
2.  
To select audio only for the tie, if necessary, press and release the RGBHV  
(CrossPoint 450 Plus switchers) or Video (MAV Plus video switchers) button  
and the Audio button (figure 3-17).  
I / O  
RGBHV AUDIO  
Press the RGBHV/Videobutton to toggle on and off. Press the Audio button to toggle on and off.  
The button is unlit or background illuminated The button lights red when selected.  
when deselected.  
Figure 3-17 — Select audio only  
3.  
Press and release the input 5 button (figure 3-18).  
The Output 3, Output 4, and Output 8 buttons light red to  
indicate the audio ties created in example 1.  
The output 1 button does not light to indicate the tie created  
in example 2 because that tie is RGBHV or video only.  
Press and release the Input 5 button.  
The button lights red to indicate that audio  
outputs can be tied to or untied from this input.  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9  
I
O
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 2N
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 2U  
T
Figure 3-18 — Select an input  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation  
3-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.  
Press and release the output 4 button (figure 3-19).  
C O N T R O L  
VIEW  
Press and release the Output 4 button.  
The button blinks red to indicate the pending change: audio input will be untied.  
ESC  
ENTER PRESET  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9  
The Enter button blinks  
green to indicate the need to  
confirm the change.  
O
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 2U  
T
= Blinking button  
Figure 3-19 — Deselect the output  
5.  
Press and release the Enter button (figure 3-20).  
Press the Enter button to  
confirm the configuration  
change.  
ENTER  
All input buttons and output buttons  
return to unlit or background illumination.  
The Enter button returns to  
unlit or background  
illumination.  
Figure 3-20 — Press the Enter button  
The current configuration (figure 3-21) is now:  
•
•
Video — Input 5 video tied to output 1, output 3, output 4, and output 8  
Audio — Input 5 audio tied to output 3 and output 8  
Input 5 video tied  
to outputs 1, 3, 4, and 8.  
Input 5 audio tied  
to outputs 3 and 8.  
Input  
5
1
3
4
Output  
8
Video  
Audio  
Figure 3-21 — Example 3, final configuration, audio switcher  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-15  
Operation, cont’d  
Viewing a configuration  
The current configuration can be viewed using the front panel buttons. The  
View-Only mode prevents inadvertent changes to the current configuration.  
View-Only mode also provides a way to mute video and audio outputs (see  
Muting and unmuting video and/or audio outputs on page 3-29.  
View the current configuration as follows:  
1.  
Press the Esc button to clear any input button indications, output button  
indications, or control button indications that may be on.  
2.  
Press and release the View button. All of the buttons for outputs that are not  
tied light:  
•
•
•
Amber: No tied video or audio input  
Green: No tied video input  
Red: No tied audio input  
3.  
Select video, audio, or both to view by pressing the RGBHV  
(CrossPoint 450 Plus switchers) or Video (MAV Plus video switchers) button  
and/or the Audio button.  
4.  
5.  
Select the desired input or output(s) whose ties you wish to view by pressing  
the input and output buttons.  
Press and release the View button ro exit View-Only mode:  
N
•
When you enter View-Only mode, the output buttons light for all outputs  
without ties.  
•
If you are viewing tied inputs and outputs and an output button for which  
there are no ties is pushed, the output buttons turn on for all outputs without  
ties.  
•
•
•
To see all ties of the current configuration, press and release each input  
and output button, one at a time, with the RGBHV (CrossPoint 450 Plus  
switchers) or Video (MAV Plus video switchers) button and the Audio  
button lit.  
In View-Only mode, you can view video and audio, video-only, or audio-only  
ties. Pressing and releasing the RGBHV (CrossPoint 450 Plus switchers) or  
Video (MAV Plus video switchers) button and the Audio button toggles each  
on and off.  
When you view video and audio ties, the RGBHV (CrossPoint 450 Plus  
switchers) or Video (MAV Plus video switchers) button is lit green and  
the Audio button is lit red. After you select an input or output, the output  
buttons light different colors to show where video and audio ties are not the  
same (audio is broken away).  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Amber — video and audio  
Green — video only  
Red — audio only  
•
After 30 seconds of front panel inactivity, View-Only mode automatically  
deselects.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation  
3-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Example 4: Viewing video and audio, audio only, and video only ties  
The following example shows the viewing of the video and audio, audio-only,  
and video-only ties in the current configuration. The steps show the front panel  
indications that result from your action.  
This example assumes that you have performed example 1, example 2, and  
example 3.  
N
1.  
Press and release the Esc button (figure 3-22).  
Press the Esc button to clear all selections.  
C O N T R O L  
VIEW  
ESC  
ENTER PRESET  
The button flashes once.  
Figure 3-22 — Clear all selections  
2.  
Press and release the View button to enter View-Only mode. The View button  
lights red.  
3.  
To select both video and audio for viewing, if necessary, press and release the  
RGBHV (CrossPoint 450 Plus switchers) or Video (MAV Plus video switchers)  
button and the Audio button (figure 3-23).  
I / O  
VIDEO AUDIO  
Press the RGBHV/ Video Press the Audio button  
button to toggle on and off. to toggle on and off.  
The button lights green The button lights red  
when selected. when selected.  
Until you select an input, the buttons for all untied outputs light  
amber if no inputs are tied, green if no video inputs are tied  
(only audio is tied), or red if no audio inputs are tied (only  
video is tied).  
1 2 3  
6 7 8  
4 5  
9
O
U
T
P
U
T
17 18 19  
22 23 24  
20 21  
2
5
S
49 50 51 52 53 54 55  
56  
Until you select an input, the buttons for all untied outputs light  
amber if no inputs are tied, green if no video inputs are tied  
(only audio is tied), or red if no audio inputs are tied (only  
video is tied).  
Figure 3-23 — Select RGBHV or video and audio  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-17  
Operation, cont’d  
4.  
Press and release the input 5 button (figure 3-24).  
The output buttons for outputs that are tied to input 5 light the  
appropriate color:  
Amber for audio and RGBHV or video ties (audio follow)  
Green for RGBHV or video ties (audio breakaway)  
Red for audio ties (audio breakaway)  
Press and release the Input 5 button.  
The button lights amber.  
Green  
Amber Green  
Amber  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9  
I
O
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 2N
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 2U  
T
The output buttons for outputs that are not tied to input 5 are  
either unlit or background illuminated.  
Figure 3-24 — Select an input  
A set of ties can also be viewed by selecting a tied output. To demonstrate this,  
note the number of a lit output button, and then press and release the output  
button for an untied (unlit or background illumination) output. Observe that  
all of the untied outputs light. Then press the output button that you noted  
previously and observe that the selected output button, the tied input button  
(input 5), and the output buttons light for all of the outputs that are tied to the  
input.  
N
5.  
Press and release the RGBHV (CrossPoint 450 Plus switchers) or Video  
(MAV Plus video switchers) button to deselect RGBHV or video (figure 3-25).  
I / O  
The output buttons for outputs that are tied to input 5 light red  
to indicate audio ties (audio breakaway).  
VIDEO AUDIO  
Red  
Red  
Press the RGBHV/ Video The Audio button  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9  
button to deselect it. remains lit red to  
indicate that only audio  
is selected.  
The button is unlit or  
background illuminated  
when deselected.  
O
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 2U  
T
The output buttons for outputs that are not tied to input 5 are  
either unlit or background illuminated.  
Figure 3-25 — Deselect RGBHV or video to view audio ties only  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation  
3-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6.  
Press and release the RGBHV (CrossPoint 450 Plus switchers) or  
Video (MAV Plus video switchers) button and the Audio button to toggle  
the RGBHV or Video button on green and the Audio button either unlit or  
providing background illumination (figure 3-26).  
I / O  
The output buttons for outputs that are tied to input 5 light  
green to indicate RGBHV/Video ties (audio breakaway).  
VIDEO AUDIO  
Green  
Green Green  
Green  
Press the RGBHV/ Press the Audio button to  
Video button to select it. deselect it.  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9  
The button lights green The button is unlit or  
when selected. background illuminated  
when deselected.  
O
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 2U  
T
The output buttons for outputs that are not tied to input 5 are  
either unlit or background illuminated.  
Figure 3-26 — Deselect audio and select RGBHV or video to view  
RGBHV or video only  
If video ties are established for input 5, the output buttons for all video  
outputs tied to input 5 light green. If no ties are established for input 5, all  
output buttons return to either unlit or to background illumination.  
7.  
Press and release the View button to exit View-Only mode (figure 3-27).  
Press the View button  
to exit View-Only mode.  
VIEW  
All input buttons and output buttons  
return to unlit or background illumination.  
The View button returns to  
unlit or background  
illumination.  
Figure 3-27 — Press the View button to exit View-Only mode  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-19  
Operation, cont’d  
I/O grouping  
I/O grouping is a matrix switcher feature that allows you to subdivide the front  
panel control of the matrix into four smaller functional sub-switchers and limit tie  
creation from the front panel only. Inputs and outputs can be assigned to one of  
four groups or not assigned to any group.  
Inputs and outputs that are assigned to a group can only be tied to other outputs  
and inputs within the same group when you are creating ties on the front panel.  
For example, a front panel operator cannot tie an input that is assigned to group 1  
to an output that is assigned to group 2. Ungrouped inputs and outputs can be  
switched to outputs and inputs in any group. Ties between groups (an input  
in group 1 tied to an output in group 2) can be created under RS-232/RS-422 or  
Ethernet control.  
Suggested applications for the I/O grouping feature include:  
•
Segregating specific video formats to prevent an input in one video format  
from being inadvertently applied to an output device that supports another  
video format (figure 3-28).  
•
•
Segregating input and output devices that are in separate rooms.  
Isolating video from being displayed on specific output devices for  
operational security reasons.  
1
2 3  
5
6 7  
8
10 11  
4
9
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25  
27  
17  
26  
39  
33 34 35 36 37 38  
40 41 42 43  
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58  
59  
Group 1  
Group 2  
Group 3  
VSC 700  
SCAN CONVERTER  
FREEZE  
RESET  
MENU  
NEXT  
SIZE  
IR  
MIN/MAX  
CENTER/PAN/SIZE  
1
2 3  
5
6 7  
8
10 11  
4
9
VSC 700  
Projector  
Computer #1  
Computer #3  
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25  
27  
3 input, 4 output  
RGBHV matrix  
17  
26  
Input  
24 25 26  
39  
33 34 35 36 37 38  
40 41 42 43  
5
6
7
8
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58  
59  
Output  
Group 3  
Monitor  
4 input, 2 output  
composite video matrix  
3 input, 2 output  
S-video matrix  
INPUTS  
PICTURE ADJUSTMENTS  
BRT/CONT COL/TNT  
ADJUST  
FREEZE  
FREEZE  
RGB  
1
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
A
L
C
O
M
P
O
S
I
T
E
S
-
V
I
D
E
O
SDI  
5
CENTER  
SIZE  
ZOOM  
DETAIL  
MENU  
2
3
4
NEXT  
USP 405  
UNIVERSAL SIGNAL PROCESSOR  
USP 405  
Monitor  
Input  
17 18 19 20  
Document Camera  
Camera #1  
Camera #4  
Input  
21 22 23  
3
Monitor  
Monitor  
1
2
Output  
Output  
4
VCR  
DVD  
Group 1  
Group 2  
Figure 3-28 — I/O grouping of incompatible video formats  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation  
3-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The I/O groups can be set up on the front panel or by using RS-232/RS-422 and  
Ethernet ports and either the SIS or the Windows control program (see chapter 4,  
SIS Programming and Control, and chapter 5, Matrix Software. Create I/O groups on  
the front panel as follows:  
1.  
Press the Esc button to clear any input buttons, output buttons, or control  
buttons that may be lit.  
2.  
To enter I/O Group mode, press and hold the Input 1 and Output 1 buttons  
until the input and output buttons light to display the ungrouped inputs and  
outputs.  
3.  
Press and release one of the Control buttons to select a group:  
•
•
•
•
Press the Enter button to select group 1.  
Press the Preset button to select group 2.  
Press the View button to select group 3.  
Press the Esc button to select group 4.  
4.  
5.  
Select the desired input(s) and output(s) to assign to the group by pressing the  
input and output buttons.  
Press and release the RGBHV/Video and Audio button to exit the I/O Group  
mode, or allow the mode to time out after approximately 30 seconds.  
N
•
•
Ties between groups (an input in group 1 tied to an output in group 2) can  
be created under RS-232/RS-422 or Ethernet control.  
Presets can be created under RS-232/RS-422 or Ethernet control that tie  
inputs and outputs across group boundaries. These presets are selectable  
from the front panel.  
•
•
An input or output can be assigned to only one group. If you assign an  
input or output to a group and that input or output is already assigned to a  
different group, the older grouping is discarded in favor of the new grouping.  
Audio can be broken away from the video for a given input or output  
(assigned to different groups) by isolating only video or only audio using the  
front panel RGBHV (CrossPoint 450 Plus)/Video (MAV Plus) and/or Audio  
buttons after you select I/O Group mode (between steps 2 and 3).  
Audio breakaway across different groups can be confusing when operating  
the front panel; is not displayed by the Matrix Switchers Control Program,  
HTML pages, or SIS commands; and is not recommended.  
•
For I/O groups to have any function, at least two groups must be created.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-21  
Operation, cont’d  
Example 5: Grouping inputs and outputs  
In the following example, several switcher inputs and outputs are assigned to  
groups. The steps show the front panel indications that result from your action.  
1.  
Press and release the Esc button (figure 3-29).  
Press the Esc button to clear all selections.  
C O N T R O L  
VIEW  
ESC  
ENTER PRESET  
The button flashes once.  
Figure 3-29 — Clear all selections  
2.  
To enter I/O Group mode, press and hold the Input 1 and Output 1 buttons  
(figure 3-30).  
Press and hold the Input 1 button and Output 1 button.  
1 2 3  
Release the Input 1 button  
and Output 1 button.  
I
17 18 1N  
1
2 seconds  
Ungrouped input and  
output buttons light.  
1
1 2 3  
O
17 18 1U  
T
Figure 3-30 — Select I/O Group mode  
3.  
Press and release the Enter button to select group 1 (figure 3-31).  
Press and release the Enter button to select group 1.  
The button lights amber to indicate the selection.  
C O N T R O L  
VIEW  
ESC  
ENTER PRESET  
Group # 1  
2
3
4
Figure 3-31 — Select an I/O group  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation  
3-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.  
Press and release the input 1 through 4 and output 1 through 4 buttons  
(figure 3-32).  
Press and release the Input 1 through Input 4 buttons. The selected buttons light.  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9  
I
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 2N  
Press and release the Output 1 through Output 4 buttons. The selected buttons light.  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9  
O
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 2U  
T
Figure 3-32 — Assign inputs and outputs  
5.  
Press and release the Preset button to select group 2 (figure 3-33).  
Press and release the Preset button to select group 2.  
The button lights amber to indicate the selection.  
C O N T R O L  
VIEW  
ESC  
ENTER PRESET  
Group # 1  
2
3
4
Figure 3-33 — Select an I/O group  
6.  
Press and release the input 5 through 8 and output 5 through 8 buttons  
(figure 3-34).  
Press and release the Input 5 through Input 8 buttons. The selected buttons light.  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9  
I
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 2N  
Press and release the Output 5 through Output 8 buttons. The selected buttons light.  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9  
O
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 2U  
T
Figure 3-34 — Assign inputs and outputs  
7.  
Do nothing for approximately 30 seconds. The front panel times out and the  
switcher exits I/O Group mode.  
•
•
Group 1 consists of inputs 1 through 4 and outputs 1 through 4.  
Group 2 consists of inputs 5 through 8 and outputs 5 through 8.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-23  
Operation, cont’d  
Setting RGB delay (systems with wideband BMEs)  
A switcher that includes a CrossPoint 450 Plus Sync BME can briefly blank the RGB  
(video) output while it switches to the new input’s sync source, and then switches  
the RGB signals. This allows a brief delay for the display to adjust to the selected  
input’s sync timing before displaying the new picture, which will appear without  
glitches. RGB delay, also known as Triple-Action Switching™ or video mute  
switching, is user selectable from 0 to 5 seconds, in half-second increments.  
The RGB delay interval can be set on the front panel or by using RS-232/RS-422  
and Ethernet ports and either the SIS, Windows control program, or HTML  
pages (see chapter 4, SIS Programming and Control, chapter 5, Matrix Software, and  
chapter 6, HTML operation. Specify the RGB delay interval for a specific output on  
the front panel as follows:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Press the Esc button to clear any input buttons, output buttons, or control  
buttons that may be lit.  
To enter RGB Delay mode, press and hold the RGBHV button until the button  
begins to blink green, then release the button.  
Press and release an output button to select an output.  
Each lit input button, from Input 1 through Input 10, indicates a half second of  
RGB delay interval for the selected output.  
4.  
5.  
Press and release the Esc ( ) and View ( ) buttons to increase and decrease  
the interval.  
>
<
Press and release the RGBHV button to exit the RGB Delay mode. The  
RGBHV button stops blinking.  
N
•
•
•
Pressing the Enter or Preset button also exits RGB Delay mode. Pressing the  
Preset button changes to Recall Preset mode.  
The RGB interval for each output is stored in non-volatile memory. When  
power is removed and restored, the delay settings are retained.  
Exiting RGB Delay mode by pressing the RGBHV button always returns the  
I/O configuration to audio only selected for configuration.  
Example 6: Setting the RGB delay for an output  
In the following example, the RGB delay is increased for output 17. The steps show  
the front panel indications that result from your action.  
1.  
Press and release the Esc button (figure 3-35).  
Press the Esc button to clear all selections.  
C O N T R O L  
VIEW  
ESC  
ENTER PRESET  
The button flashes once.  
Figure 3-35 — Clear all selections  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation  
3-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.  
Press and hold the RGBHV button for approximately 2 seconds (figure 3-36).  
2 seconds  
RGBHV  
RGBHV  
Press and hold the RGBHV button until it blinks.  
= Blinking button  
Figure 3-36 — Select RGB Delay mode  
3.  
Press and release the output 17 button (figure 3-37).  
The Input 1 through Input 10 buttons display the selected output's RGB delay.  
Each lit input button indicates half a second of delay.  
In this example, the green input buttons display 3.5 seconds of RGB delay.  
0.5  
1.0  
1.5  
2.0  
2.5  
3.0  
3.5  
1 2 3  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1
Press and release the  
Output 17 button.  
The button lights green.  
O
I
17 18 1U  
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 2
N
T
= Unlit button  
= Lit button  
Figure 3-37 — Select an output  
4.  
Press and release the Esc ( ) button once (figure 3-38) to increase the RGB  
delay by a half second.  
>
Press and release the Esc ( ) button twice more to increase the RGB delay by a  
>
whole second. Note the input button indication changes that occur each time  
the Esc ( ) button is pressed and released.  
>
Figure 3-38 show the result of pressing the Esc ( ) button a total of 3 times.  
>
Press the Esc button to increase the RGB interval that is applied to switches to  
the selected output by a half second per button push.  
0.5  
1.0  
1.5  
2.0  
2.5  
3.0  
3.5  
4.0  
4.5  
5.0  
1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1
ESC  
ESC  
ESC  
I
N
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 2
The Input 1 through Input 10 buttons display the selected output's RGB delay.  
Each lit input button indicates half a second of delay.  
In this example, the green input buttons display 5.0 seconds of RGB interval.  
= Unlit button  
= Lit button  
Figure 3-38 — Adjust the RGB delay interval  
You can press and hold the Esc ( ) or View ( ) button to ramp the delay up or  
N
>
<
down to the high or low limit.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-25  
Operation, cont’d  
5. Press and release the RGBHV button (figure 3-39).  
Press the RGBHV button  
to exit RGB delay mode.  
I / O  
RGBHV AUDIO  
All input buttons and output buttons  
return to unlit or background illumination.  
The RGBHV button stops  
blinking and goes out or  
becomes background  
illuminated.  
The Audio button lights red.  
Figure 3-39 — Deselect RGB Delay mode  
Using presets  
The current configuration (configuration 0) can be saved as a preset in any one of  
64 preset memory addresses. Preset locations are assigned to the input buttons.  
Presets can be selected from the front panel to be either saved or retrieved. When a  
preset is retrieved from memory, it becomes the current configuration.  
N
•
•
•
All switchers have 64 presets, selectable from the front panel, regardless of the  
matrix size.  
Only the audio and video ties are stored and recalled; audio gain settings are  
not saved, and they do not change when a preset is recalled.  
Presets cannot be viewed from the front panel unless recalled as the current  
configuration. Presets can be viewed using Extron’s Windows-based control  
program. See Chapter 5, Matrix Software, for more details.  
•
•
The current configuration and all presets are stored in non-volatile memory.  
When power is removed and restored, the current configuration is still active  
and all presets are retained.  
When a preset is recalled, it replaces the current configuration, which is lost  
unless it is also stored as a preset. The recalled preset overwrites all of the  
current configuration ties in favor of the preset configuration ties.  
Example 7: Saving a preset  
In the following example, the current configuration is saved as a preset. The steps  
show the front panel indications that result from your action.  
1.  
Press and release the Esc button (figure 3-40).  
Press the Esc button to clear all selections.  
C O N T R O L  
VIEW  
ESC  
ENTER PRESET  
The button flashes once.  
Figure 3-40 — Clear all selections  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation  
3-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.  
Press and hold the Preset button for approximately 2 seconds until it blinks  
(figure 3-41).  
Red  
2 seconds  
(Preset Assigned)  
PRESET  
PRESET  
Press and hold the Preset button until it blinks.  
1 2 3  
All input buttons with assigned presets light red.  
If you then save the configuration to a lit preset number,  
the configuration data at that preset location will be overwritten.  
I
17 18 1N  
Unlit  
= Blinking button  
(No Preset Assigned)  
Figure 3-41 — Enter Save Preset mode  
3. Press and release the input or output button for the desired preset  
(figure 3-42).  
Press and release the Input 1 button.  
The button blinks red to indicate that this  
preset number is selected but not saved.  
C O N T R O L  
VIEW  
ESC  
ENTER PRESET  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9  
The Enter button blinks to  
indicate the need to save the  
preset.  
The Preset button continues  
to blink.  
I
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 2N  
= Blinking button  
Figure 3-42 — Select the preset  
4.  
Press and release the Enter button (figure 3-43). The current configuration is  
now stored in the selected memory location.  
Press the Enter button to  
save the preset.  
C O N T R O L  
VIEW  
ESC  
ENTER PRESET  
All input buttons and output  
buttons return to unlit or  
background illumination.  
The Enter and Preset  
buttons return to unlit or  
background illumination.  
Figure 3-43 — Press the Enter button  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-27  
Operation, cont’d  
Example 8: Recalling a preset  
In the following example, a preset is recalled to become the current configuration.  
The steps show the front panel indications that result from your action.  
1.  
Press and release the Esc button (figure 3-44).  
Press the Esc button to clear all selections.  
C O N T R O L  
VIEW  
ESC  
ENTER PRESET  
The button flashes once.  
Figure 3-44 — Clear all selections  
2.  
Press and release the Preset button (figure 3-45).  
Red  
(Preset Assigned)  
Press and release the Preset button.  
The Preset button lights.  
1 2 3  
PRESET  
I
All input buttons with  
assigned presets light red.  
17 18 1N  
Unlit  
(No Preset Assigned)  
Figure 3-45 — Enter Recall Preset mode  
3.  
Press and release the input or output button for the desired preset  
(figure 3-46).  
Press and release the Input 1 button.  
The button blinks red to indicate that this  
preset number is selected but not recalled.  
C O N T R O L  
VIEW  
ESC  
ENTER PRESET  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9  
The Enter button blinks  
to indicate the need to  
recall the preset.  
I
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 2N  
= Blinking button  
Figure 3-46 — Select the preset  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation  
3-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.  
Press and release the Enter button (figure 3-47). The configuration stored in  
selected memory location is now the current configuration and can be viewed  
in the View-Only mode (see example 4).  
Press the Enter button to  
recall the preset.  
C O N T R O L  
ENTER PRESET VIEW  
ESC  
All input buttons return to unlit or background illumination.  
The Enter and Preset  
buttons return to unlit or  
background illumination.  
1 2 3  
I
17 18 1N  
Figure 3-47 — Press the Enter button  
Muting and unmuting video and/or audio outputs  
Individual outputs can be muted or unmuted as follows:  
1.  
Press the Esc button to clear any input button indications, output button  
indications, or control button indications that may be on.  
2.  
3.  
Press and release the View button.  
Select video, audio, or both to mute or unmute by pressing the RGBHV  
(CrossPoint 450 Plus switchers) or Video (MAV Plus video switchers)  
button and/or the Audio button.  
4.  
One at a time, press and hold the output button(s) for the desired output(s)  
for approximately 2 seconds. The output LED(s) for the selected output(s)  
blink to indicate the mute or return to their previous state to indicate the  
unmute.  
5.  
Press and release the View button to return to normal switcher operation.  
N
•
You can mute video and audio, video-only, or audio-only outputs. Pressing  
and releasing the RGBHV (CrossPoint 450 Plus switchers) or Video  
(MAV Plus video switchers) button and the Audio button toggles each  
selection on and off.  
•
•
When you enter View-Only mode, the output LEDs turn on for all outputs  
without ties.  
On CrossPoint 450 Plus switchers, the video mute function mutes the  
wideband video switching BMEs (the R, G, and B planes) only; the sync  
switching BMEs (the H and V planes) are still active. On MAV Plus low  
resolution video switching BMEs, the video mute function mutes all video  
planes.  
•
Mutes are saved to non-volatile memory. When power is removed and  
restored, the mute settings are retained.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-29  
Operation, cont’d  
Example 9: Muting and unmuting an output  
In the following example, several switcher outputs are muted and unmuted. The  
steps show the front panel indications that result from your action.  
1.  
Press and release the Esc button (figure 3-48).  
Press the Esc button to clear all selections.  
C O N T R O L  
VIEW  
ESC  
ENTER PRESET  
The button flashes once.  
Figure 3-48 — Clear all selections  
2.  
Press and release the View button to enter View-Only mode. The View button  
lights red.  
3.  
To select both video and audio for viewing and muting, if necessary, press and  
release the RGBHV (CrossPoint 450 Plus switchers) or Video (MAV Plus video  
switchers) button and the Audio button (figure 3-49).  
This example shows the front panel indications if example 1, example 2, and  
example 3 have been completed.  
N
I / O  
VIDEO AUDIO  
Press the RGBHV/ Video Press the Audio button  
button to toggle on and off. to toggle on and off.  
The button lights green The button lights red  
when selected. when selected.  
Until you select an input, the buttons for all untied outputs light  
amber if no inputs are tied, green if no video inputs are tied  
(only audio is tied), or red if no audio inputs are tied (only  
video is tied).  
1 2 3  
6 7 8  
4 5  
9
O
U
T
P
U
T
17 18 19  
22 23 24  
20 21  
2
5
S
49 50 51 52 53 54 55  
56  
Until you select an input, the buttons for all untied outputs light  
amber if no inputs are tied, green if no video inputs are tied  
(only audio is tied), or red if no audio inputs are tied (only  
video is tied).  
Figure 3-49 — Select RGBHV or video and audio  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation  
3-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.  
One at a time, press and hold the Output 3 and then the Output 4 buttons  
(figure 3-50) for approximately 2 seconds until the buttons begin to blink. The  
output 3 and output 4 video and audio signals are muted.  
Mute outputs one at a time.  
2 seconds  
3
3
Press and hold the Output 3 button.  
The button blinks amber to indicate that  
the RGBHV and audio outputs are muted.  
2 seconds  
4
4
Press and hold the Output 4 button.  
The button blinks amber to indicate that  
the RGBHV and audio outputs are muted.  
= Blinking button  
Figure 3-50 — Mute the outputs  
If both RGBHV/video and audio are selected, the mute action toggles both the  
N
video and audio outputs. If either the video output or the audio output is already  
muted, the unmuted output is muted and the muted output is unmuted.  
If both RGBHV/video and audio are selected and only video is muted, the output  
button flashes between green and amber. If only audio is selected, the output  
button flashes between red and amber.  
N
5.  
One at a time, press and hold the Output 3 and then the Output 4 buttons  
(figure 3-51) for approximately 2 seconds until the buttons lights steadily.  
The output 3 and output 4 video and audio signals are unmuted.  
Mute outputs one at a time.  
2 seconds  
3
3
Press and hold the Output 3 button.  
The button lights amber to indicate that  
the RGBHV and audio outputs are not muted.  
2 seconds  
Press and hold the Output 4 button.  
4
4
The button lights amber to indicate that  
the RGBHV and audio outputs are not muted.  
= Blinking button  
Figure 3-51 — Unmute the outputs  
If both RGBHV/video and audio are selected, the unmute action toggles both the  
N
video and audio outputs. If either the video output or the audio output is already  
unmuted, the muted output is unmuted and the unmuted output is muted.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-31  
Operation, cont’d  
6.  
Press and release the View button to exit View-Only mode (figure 3-52).  
Press the View button  
to exit View-Only mode.  
VIEW  
All input buttons and output buttons  
return to unlit or background illumination.  
The View button returns to  
unlit or background  
illumination.  
Figure 3-52 — Press the View button to exit View-Only mode  
Viewing and adjusting the input audio level (systems with  
audio BMEs)  
In systems that include a MAV Plus audio BME, the audio level of each input can  
be displayed and adjusted through a range of -18 dB to +24 dB to ensure that there  
is no noticeable volume difference among sources (figure 3-53). The audio level can  
be adjusted from the front panel incorporated in BME 0 or under RS-232/RS-422 or  
Ethernet control.  
dBu  
+24  
+21  
+19  
+16  
+13  
+10  
+7  
+4  
+1  
-2  
-5  
VU  
21  
18  
15  
12  
9
6
3
0
-3  
-6  
-9  
-12  
-15  
-18  
-21  
VCR  
Audio  
Inputs  
dBu  
+24  
+21  
+19  
+16  
+13  
+10  
+7  
+4  
+1  
-2  
-5  
VU  
21  
18  
15  
12  
9
6
3
0
-3  
-6  
-9  
-12  
-15  
-18  
-21  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
I
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32  
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48  
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64  
N
P
U
T
S
CONTROL  
I/O  
VIEW  
ESC  
ENTER  
PRESET  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
POWER SUPPL  
Y
I/O CONFIG  
O
PRIMARY  
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32  
33 34 35 36 37 38  
U
T
P
U
T
S
REDUNDANT  
39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48  
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64  
MAV PLUS SERIES  
VIDEO MATRIX SWITCHER  
-8  
-12  
-15  
-18  
MAV Plus 6464  
-8  
Video BME (BME 0)  
-12  
-15  
-18  
Low Audio  
Output Level  
Output  
Level  
dBu  
+24  
+21  
+19  
+16  
+13  
+10  
+7  
+4  
+1  
-2  
-5  
VU  
21  
18  
15  
12  
9
6
3
0
-3  
-6  
-9  
-12  
-15  
-18  
-21  
POWER SUPPL  
Y
I/O CONFIG  
Audio System  
PRIMARY  
REDUNDANT  
MAV PLUS SERIES  
AUDIO MATRIX SWITCHER  
No noticeable  
volume differences  
between sources  
MAV Plus 6464  
Audio BME (BME 1)  
Audio  
Inputs  
-8  
-12  
-15  
-18  
High Audio  
Output Level  
CD Jukebox  
Figure 3-53 — Audio gain and attenuation  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Press the Esc button to clear any input buttons, output buttons, or control  
buttons that may be lit.  
To enter Audio mode, press and hold the Audio button until the button begins  
to blink red, then release the button.  
Press and release an input button to select an input. The output buttons  
display audio level and polarity (+ or –) for the selected input. Each lit output  
button indicates 1 dB of gain or attenuation. Green output buttons indicate a  
gain (+) audio level and red buttons indicate an attenuation (–) level.  
4.  
Press and release the Esc ( ) and View ( ) buttons to increase and decrease  
the audio level by 0.5 dB per push of the button.  
>
<
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation  
3-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.  
Press and release the Audio button to exit the Audio mode. The Audio button  
stops blinking.  
N
•
•
•
•
Pressing the Enter or Preset button also exits Audio mode. Pressing the  
Preset button changes to Recall Preset mode.  
There is one audio level setting per input. The audio level setting is shared  
by the left and right audio inputs.  
The audio level settings are stored in non-volatile memory. When power is  
removed and restored, the audio level settings are retained.  
Exiting Audio mode by pressing the Audio button always returns the I/O  
buttons to Video lit green and Audio lit red (video and audio selected for  
configuration).  
Example 10: Viewing and adjusting an input audio level  
In the following example, an audio level is viewed and adjusted. The steps show  
the front panel indications that result from your action.  
The output buttons display the audio gain and attenuation by each indicating 1 dB  
when lit. Output buttons lit green indicate gain; output buttons lit red indicate  
attenuation.  
1.  
Press and release the Esc button (figure 3-54).  
Press the Esc button to clear all selections.  
C O N T R O L  
VIEW  
ESC  
ENTER PRESET  
The button flashes once.  
Figure 3-54 — Clear all selections  
2.  
Press and hold the Audio button for approximately 2 seconds (figure 3-55).  
2 seconds  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
Press and hold the Audio button until it blinks.  
= Blinking button  
Figure 3-55 — Select Audio mode  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-33  
Operation, cont’d  
3.  
Press and release the input 5 button (figure 3-56).  
Press and release the Input 5 button.  
The button lights green.  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9  
I
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 2N  
Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1
O
U
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 2
The output buttons display the selected input's audio level and polarity (gain or attenuation).  
Each output button indicates 0.5 dB when flashing and 1 dB when lit steadily.  
When the buttons are lit green, they indicate a gain (+) audio level.  
When the output buttons are lit red, they indicate an attenuation (-) level.  
In this example, the output buttons display an audio gain level of +8 dB.  
= Unlit button  
Figure 3-56 — Select an input  
4.  
Press and release the View ( ) button once (figure 3-57) to decrease the input  
audio level by 0.5 dB.  
<
Press and release the View ( ) button several more times (figure 3-57) to  
<
decrease the input audio level by 0.5 dB per push. Note the output button  
indication changes that occur each time the View ( ) button is pressed.  
<
Figure 3-57 shows the result of pressing the View ( ) button a total of 17  
<
times. Note that the level is now displayed in red to indicate a negative level.  
Press the View button to decrease the input  
audio level by 0.5 dB per push of the button.  
VIEW  
Red  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1
O
U
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 2
The output buttons display the selected input's audio level and polarity (gain or attenuation).  
Each output button indicates 0.5 dB when flashing and 1 dB when lit steadily.  
When the buttons are lit green, they indicate a gain (+) audio level.  
When the output buttons are lit red, they indicate an attenuation (-) level.  
In this example, the output buttons display an audio attenuation level of -0.5 dB.  
= Unlit button  
= Blinking button  
Figure 3-57 — Adjust the input audio level  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation  
3-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
You can press and hold the Esc ( ) or View ( ) button to ramp the level up or  
down by 3 dB per second to the high or low limit.  
N
>
<
5.  
Press and release the Audio button (figure 3-58).  
Press the Audio button  
to exit audio mode.  
I / O  
VIDEO AUDIO  
All input buttons and output buttons  
return to unlit or background illumination.  
The Audio button stops  
blinking and lights red.  
The RGBHV or Video  
button lights green.  
Figure 3-58 — Deselect Audio mode  
Viewing and adjusting the output volume (systems with audio  
BMEs)  
On MAV Plus audio BMEs, the audio level of each output can be displayed and  
adjusted through a range of 100% (no attenuation) to 0% (maximum [98 dB]  
attenuation). The audio level can be adjusted from the front panel or under  
RS-232/RS-422 or Ethernet control.  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Press the Esc button to clear any input buttons, output buttons, or control  
buttons that may be lit.  
To enter Audio mode, press and hold the Audio button until the button begins  
to blink red, then release the button.  
Press and release an output button to select an output. The input buttons  
display the volume level for the selected output. The switcher indicates  
the volume; the more buttons that are lit, the higher the volume. The fewer  
buttons that are lit, the lower the volume.  
For a more detailed analysis of decoding the displayed value, see Reading the  
displayed volume on the next page.  
4.  
5.  
Press and release the Esc ( ) and View ( ) buttons to increase and decrease  
the audio volume.  
>
>
Press and release the Audio button to save the audio settings and exit the  
Audio mode. The Audio button stops blinking.  
N
•
•
•
There is one audio volume level setting per output. The audio level setting is  
shared by the left and right audio inputs.  
The audio volume levels are stored in non-volatile memory. When power is  
removed and restored, the audio level settings are retained.  
Exiting Audio mode by pressing the Audio button always returns the I/O  
buttons to Video lit green and Audio lit red (video and audio selected for  
configuration).  
•
Pressing the Enter or Preset button also exits Audio mode. Pressing the  
Preset button changes to Recall Preset mode.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-35  
Operation, cont’d  
Reading the displayed volume  
This section is a detailed look at reading the output volume display on the  
switcher’s front panel. If you do not need to read the exact value of the volume  
setting, skip this section.  
N
There are a maximum of 98 dB of volume attenuation available, that is adjustable in  
steps of 0.5 dB, except for the first step from full attenuation, which is 34.5 dB. At  
maximum attenuation, no input buttons are lit, 98 dB of attenuation is applied, and  
the audio output is effectively muted. At no attenuation, all input buttons are lit  
and the output volume is equal to the input signal plus any gain or attenuation that  
is applied to that specific input using the input audio level adjustment. See Viewing  
and adjusting the input audio level (systems with audio BMEs). See the table on the next  
page to read the volume display for each display scheme.  
The input buttons light sequentially to indicate the approximate volume of the  
selected output. Volume is defined as a percentage of the input audio signal that  
is applied to the output. From 0% of volume, the first Esc ( ) button push applies  
>
4.75% of the input audio signal and the Input 1 button flashes. From 4.75% on,  
each push of the Esc ( ) button applies 0.75% more of the input audio signal to the  
>
output and the number of output buttons flashing or lit increases:  
•
Push Esc ( ) button — 4.75% + 0.75% = 5.5% volume, indicated by the  
Input 1 button lit steadily.  
>
•
Push Esc ( ) button three more times — 5.5% + 0.75% + 0.75% + 0.75% =  
7.75% volume, indicated by the Input 1 and Input 2 buttons lit steadily and  
the Input 3 button flashing.  
>
•
Push Esc ( ) button nineteen more times — 7.75% + (19•0.75%) = 22%  
volume, indicated by the Input 1 through Input 12 buttons lit steadily.  
>
When all input buttons are lit, the audio output is 100% of the audio input level.  
Another way to view the volume level is to think in terms of the attenuation that  
is applied to the output. Attenuation reduction is indicated by the lit or blinking  
input buttons: when fewer input buttons are lit, attenuation is greater (and the  
volume is quieter).  
•
•
•
•
•
At minimum volume, all input buttons are unlit or background illuminated  
and 98 dB of attenuation is applied to the output. The audio output is  
effectively muted.  
The first step of volume increase causes the Input 1 button to flash.  
Attenuation is reduced by 34.5 dB (63.5 dB of attenuation is applied to the  
output).  
The second step of volume increase reduces the attenuation by an additional  
0.5 dB (62.5 dB of attenuation is applied to the output). (The Input 1 button  
lights steadily.)  
Successive steps of volume increase cause consecutive buttons to flash and  
then light. Each consecutive lit button indicates a full 1 dB of attenuation  
reduction.  
The buttons’ volume indications are additive. For example: Input 1 lit  
([34.5 dB + 0.5 dB] of attenuation reduction) and Input 2 lit [0.5 dB + 0.5 dB]  
of attenuation reduction) indicate that the output attenuation has been  
reduced by a total of 36 dB:  
(34.5 dB + 0.5 dB + 0.5 dB +0.5 dB = 36 dB).  
•
At full volume, no attenuation is applied to the output and all input buttons  
are lit steadily.  
See the table on the next page to read the volume display.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation  
3-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Audio volume adjustment settings  
Highest  
dB of  
Output Highest  
dB of  
Output Highest  
dB of  
Output Highest  
dB of  
Output  
# input attenuation volume # input attenuation volume # input attenuation volume # input attenuation volume  
button lit  
button lit  
button lit  
button lit  
None  
0%  
98  
1
1
63.5  
4.75%  
17  
17  
47.5  
47  
28.75%  
29.5%  
33  
33  
31.5  
31  
52.75%  
53.5%  
49  
49  
15.5  
15  
76.75%  
77.5%  
63  
62.5  
62  
5.5%  
6.25%  
7%  
2
2
18  
18  
46.5  
30.25%  
34  
34  
30.5  
54.25%  
50  
50  
14.5  
78.25%  
46  
45.5  
45  
31%  
30  
55%  
14  
13.5  
13  
79%  
29.5  
55.75%  
3
3
19  
19  
35  
35  
51  
51  
61.5  
61  
7.75%  
8.5%  
9.25%  
31.75%  
32.5%  
33.25%  
79.75%  
80.5%  
81.25%  
29  
56.5%  
4
4
60.5  
20  
20  
44.5  
36  
36  
28.5  
57.25%  
52  
52  
12.5  
60  
59.5  
59  
10%  
10.75%  
11.5%  
12.25%  
13%  
44  
43.5  
43  
34%  
34.75%  
35.5%  
36.25%  
37%  
28  
27.5  
27  
58%  
58.75%  
59.5%  
60.25%  
61%  
12  
11.5  
11  
82%  
5
5
21  
21  
37  
37  
53  
53  
82.75%  
83.5%  
84.25%  
85%  
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
58.5  
58  
22  
22  
23  
23  
24  
24  
25  
25  
42.5  
42  
38  
38  
39  
39  
40  
40  
41  
41  
26.5  
26  
54  
54  
55  
55  
56  
56  
57  
57  
10.5  
10  
41.5  
41  
37.75%  
38.5%  
39.25%  
40%  
57.5  
57  
13.75%  
14.5%  
15.25%  
16%  
25.5  
25  
61.75%  
62.5%  
63.25%  
64%  
9.5  
9
85.75%  
86.5%  
87.25%  
88%  
56.5  
56  
40.5  
40  
24.5  
24  
8.5  
8
7.5  
7
88.75%  
89.5%  
90.25%  
55.5  
55  
16.75%  
17.5%  
18.25%  
19%  
39.5  
39  
40.75%  
41.5%  
42.25%  
43%  
23.5  
23  
64.75%  
65.5%  
66.25%  
67%  
10  
10  
11  
11  
12  
12  
13  
13  
14  
14  
15  
15  
16  
16  
54.5  
54  
26  
26  
27  
27  
28  
28  
29  
29  
30  
30  
31  
31  
32  
32  
38.5  
38  
42  
42  
43  
43  
44  
44  
45  
45  
46  
46  
47  
47  
48  
48  
22.5  
22  
58  
58  
59  
59  
60  
60  
61  
61  
62  
62  
63  
63  
64  
64  
6.5  
6
5.5  
5
91%  
91.75%  
92.5%  
93.25%  
94%  
53.5  
53  
19.75%  
20.5%  
37.5  
37  
43.75%  
44.5%  
21.5  
21  
67.75%  
68.5%  
52.5  
52  
21.25%  
22%  
36.5  
36  
45.25%  
46%  
20.5  
20  
69.25%  
70%  
4.5  
4
51.5  
51  
22.75 %  
23.5%  
35.5  
35  
46.75%  
47.5%  
19.5  
19  
70.75%  
71.5%  
3.5  
3
94.75%  
95.5%  
50.5  
50  
24.25%  
25%  
34.5  
34  
48.25%  
49%  
18.5  
18  
72.25%  
73%  
2.5  
2
96.25%  
97%  
49.5  
49  
25.75%  
26.5%  
33.5  
33  
49.75%  
50.5%  
17.5  
17  
73.75%  
74.5%  
1.5  
1
97.75%  
98.5%  
48.5  
48  
27.25%  
28%  
32.5  
32  
51.25%  
52%  
16.5  
16  
75.25%  
76%  
0.5  
0
99.25%  
100%  
= blinking LED  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-37  
Operation, cont’d  
Example 11: Viewing and adjusting an output volume level  
In the following example, the audio output volume is viewed and adjusted. The  
steps show the front panel indications that result from your action. See the table on  
page 3-37 to read the displayed audio output volume.  
1.  
Press and release the Esc button (figure 3-59).  
Press the Esc button to clear all selections.  
C O N T R O L  
VIEW  
ESC  
ENTER PRESET  
The button flashes once.  
Figure 3-59 — Clear all selections  
2.  
Press and hold the Audio button for approximately 2 seconds (figure 3-60).  
2 seconds  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
Press and hold the Audio button until it blinks.  
= Blinking button  
Figure 3-60 — Select Audio mode  
3.  
Press and release the output 17 button (figure 3-61).  
The input buttons display the selected output's audio volume level.  
Each lit input button beyond input 1 indicates 1.5 percent of the total input volume is applied to the  
output.  
In this example, the green input buttons indicate 41.5 percent of the applied audio input. The unlit  
input buttons indicate an audio volume attenuation of 39 dB.  
1 2  
1
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
Press and release  
the Output 17 button.  
The button lights  
green.  
O
I
N
30  
31 32  
17 1U  
3 24 25  
1
27 28 29  
26  
T
39 dB attenuation,  
41.5% volume  
= Unlit button  
= Lit button  
Figure 3-61 — Select output 17  
4.  
Press and release the Esc ( ) button once (figure 3-62) to increase the volume  
by 0.75%.  
>
Press and release the Esc ( ) button several more times (figure 3-62) to  
>
increase the volume by 0.75% (0.5 dB) per button push. Note the input button  
indication changes that occur each time the Esc ( ) button is pressed and  
>
released.  
You can press and hold the Esc ( ) or View ( ) button to ramp the level up or  
down by 3 dB per second to the high or low limit.  
N
>
<
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation  
3-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 3-62 show the result of pressing the Esc ( ) button a total of 13 times.  
>
Press the Esc button to decrease the audio attenuation (thereby increasing the audio  
level) that is applied to the output volume level by 0.75% (0.5) dB per button push.  
ESC  
6
8
10  
26  
42  
12 13  
28 29  
44 45  
15  
16  
1
7
9
11  
27  
43  
14  
30  
46  
I
1 22 23 24 25  
1
31 32  
47 48  
N
P
U
T
S
7 38 39 40 41  
3
32.5 dB attenuation,  
51.25% volume  
The input buttons display the selected output's audio volume level.  
Each lit input button beyond input 1 indicates 1.5 percent of the total input volume is  
applied to the output.  
In this example, the lit and flashing input buttons display 51.25 percent of the applied audio  
input. The flashing and unlit input buttons indicate an audio volume attenuation of 32.5 dB.  
= Unlit button  
= Lit button  
= Blinking button  
Figure 3-62 — Adjust the output audio volume  
5.  
Press and release the Audio button (figure 3-63).  
Press the Audio button  
to exit audio mode.  
I / O  
VIDEO AUDIO  
All input buttons and output buttons  
return to unlit or background illumination.  
The Audio button stops  
blinking and lights red.  
The RGBHV or Video  
button lights green.  
Figure 3-63 — Deselect Audio mode  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-39  
Operation, cont’d  
Locking out the front panel (Executive mode)  
In a system with multiple front panel controllers, Extron recommends locking  
the front panel of BMEs other than BME 0 to prevent confusion.  
N
The front panel security lockout limits the operation of the switcher system from  
the front panel controller. When the switcher is locked, all of the front panel  
functions are disabled except for the View-Only mode functions. See Viewing a  
configuration on page 3-16. Other than in View-Only mode, if the user pushes a front  
panel button when the switcher is locked, the RGBHV (CrossPoint 450 Plus) or  
Video (MAV Plus) and Audio buttons flash twice and return to their previous state.  
To toggle the lock on and off, press and hold the RGBHV (CrossPoint 450 Plus) or  
Video (MAV Plus) button and the Audio button for approximately two seconds  
(figure 3-64).  
Press and hold the RGBHV /Video  
and Audio buttons simultaneously  
to toggle executive mode on or off.  
The RGBHV/ Video  
I / O  
I / O  
and Audio buttons  
blink twice to indicate  
the mode change.  
Release the buttons.  
2 seconds  
VIDEO AUDIO  
VIDEO AUDIO  
Figure 3-64 — Toggle front panel lock on or off  
Performing a system reset from the front panel  
E
}
The front panel reset is identical to the  
ZXXX SIS command (see chapter 4,  
SIS Programming and Control). A system reset clears all ties and presets, all video  
and audio mutes, resets all I/O grouping, sets all input audio levels to unity gain  
(+0 dB), and sets all output volume levels to 100% (0 dB of attenuation).  
Reset the switcher to the factory default settings by pressing and holding the  
RGBHV (CrossPoint 450 Plus) or Video (MAV Plus) button and Audio button while  
you apply AC power to the switcher (figure 3-65).  
System reset does not reset the Internet protocol (IP) settings or replace user-  
installed firmware.  
N
Press and hold the RGBHV/Video and Audio buttons while you apply  
power to the switcher.  
I / O  
VIDEO AUDIO  
Power  
The switcher flashes the button indicators green, red, and  
amber and then turns them off.  
Continue to hold the RGBHV/Video and Audio buttons until all input and output buttons return to  
either unlit or to background illumination and the RGBHV or Video and Audio buttons turn on.  
Release the RGBHV/Video and Audio buttons.  
Figure 3-65 — System reset  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation  
3-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Background illumination  
The buttons on the front panel can be set to provide amber background  
illumination at all times or the background illumination can be turned off. To  
toggle the background illumination on or off, press and hold the Input 1 and  
Input 2 buttons for approximately two seconds (figure 3-66).  
Press and hold the Input 1 and Input 2  
buttons simultaneously to toggle  
background illumination mode on or off.  
1 2 3  
I
17 18 1N  
2 seconds  
1 2 3  
Release the Input 1  
and Input 2 buttons.  
I
17 18 1N  
Figure 3-66 — Toggle background illumination on or off  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-41  
Operation, cont’d  
Selecting the rear panel Remote port protocol and baud rate  
The switcher can support either the RS-232 or the RS-422 serial communication  
protocol, and operate at 9600, 19200, 38400, and 115200 baud rates. The settings of  
these variables can be viewed and changed from the front panel.  
View and configure the switcher’s serial communications settings as follows:  
1.  
To enter Serial Port Configuration mode, simultaneously press and hold all  
Control buttons (Enter, Preset, View, and Esc) (figure 3-67).  
Press and hold the Enter, Preset, View, and Esc buttons.  
I / O  
C O N T R O L  
VIEW  
C O N T R O L  
2 seconds  
ESC  
VIEW  
ESC  
ENTER PRESET  
RGBHV AUDIO  
ENTER PRESET  
All Control buttons light with one flashing.  
Both I/O buttons light with one flashing.  
The flashing Control button indicates the baud rate as follows:  
Enter — 9600  
Preset — 19200  
View — 38400  
Esc — 115200  
The flashing I/O button indicates the protocol as follows:  
RGBHV/Video — RS-232 Audio — RS-422/RS-485  
In this example, the port is set to RS-232 at 9600 baud.  
= Blinking button  
Figure 3-67 — RS-232/RS-422 and baud rate display  
2.  
Release the Control buttons.  
3.  
To change a value, press and release the button that relates to the desired  
value (figure 3-68).  
Press and release the button(s) to configure the port as  
follows:  
Baud rate:  
Enter — 9600  
View — 38400  
Preset — 19200  
Esc — 115200  
Serial protocol:  
RGBHV/Video — RS-232  
Audio — RS-422/RS-485  
The selected buttons blink and the others remain lit.  
In this example, the port is set to RS-422 at 38400 baud.  
I / O  
C O N T R O L  
VIEW  
ESC  
ENTER PRESET  
RGBHV AUDIO  
= Blinking button  
Figure 3-68 — RS-232/RS-422 and baud rate selection  
4.  
Press and release an input or output button to exit the Serial Port Configuration  
mode (figure 3-69).  
Press and release an  
input or output button.  
All Control and I/O buttons return to unlit or background illumination.  
I / O  
C O N T R O L  
VIEW  
ESC  
ENTER PRESET  
RGBHV AUDIO  
5
Figure 3-69 — Exit Serial Port Configuration mode  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation  
3-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Rear Panel Controls  
The rear panel has a Reset button that initiates four levels of matrix switcher resets.  
Press and hold the button while the switcher is running or while you apply power  
to the switcher for different reset levels.  
Performing soft system resets  
The CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus switchers have three soft resets available  
that restore various tiers of switcher settings to their default settings.  
• Events (mode 3) reset — This function toggles the monitoring of events on or off  
(if events monitoring was on, this function turns it off; if it was off, it is turned on).  
• IP settings (mode 4) reset — The IP settings reset performs the following functions:  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Enables Arp program capability  
Resets the IP address to the factory default (192.168.254.254)  
Resets the subnet mask to the factory default (255.255.0.0)  
Resets the gateway address to its factory default (0.0.0.0)  
Resets port mapping to the factory default:  
❏ Rear port = primary  
❏ Front port = secondary  
❏ Both ports = 9600 baud, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity  
ꢀ
Turn DHCP off  
Turn events off  
ꢀ
IP settings reset does not replace any user-installed firmware.  
N
•
Absolute (mode 5) reset — Absolute reset restores the switcher to the default  
factory conditions, including the IP settings. This function is identical to the  
E
}
ZQQQ SIS command, see chapter 4, SIS Programming and Control).  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-43  
Operation, cont’d  
Perform a soft reset of the switcher as follows:  
1.  
Press and hold the Reset button until the Reset LED blinks once (events reset),  
twice (system reset), or three times (absolute reset) (figure 3-70).  
Release, then  
immediately  
press and hold.  
Press and hold  
Release the  
Reset button.  
the Reset button. Rx  
1
3
Events Reset  
Reset LED  
flashes once.  
Reset LED  
flashes three  
times.  
RESET  
RESET  
RESET  
RESET  
3 seconds  
3 seconds  
3 seconds  
Release, then  
immediately  
press and hold.  
Press and hold  
Release the  
Reset button.  
the Reset button. Rx  
2
3
IP Settings  
Reset  
Reset LED  
flashes twice.  
Reset LED  
flashes three  
times.  
RESET  
RESET  
RESET  
RESET  
Release, then  
immediately  
press and hold.  
Press and hold  
Release the  
Reset button.  
the Reset button. Rx  
3
3
Absolute  
Reset  
Reset LED  
Reset LED  
flashes three  
times.  
flashes three  
times.  
RESET  
RESET  
RESET  
RESET  
Figure 3-70 — Whole switcher and absolute resets  
2.  
Release the Reset button and then immediately press and hold the button  
until the LED flashes three times. Release the Reset button. Nothing happens  
if the second momentary press does not occur within 1 second.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation  
3-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Performing a hard reset  
The hard reset function restores the switcher to the base firmware that it shipped  
with. After a hard reset, events do not automatically start, but user settings and  
files are restored. Perform a hard reset as follows:  
The hard reset restores the factory-installed firmware. The switcher reverts to  
that factory firmware the next time power is cycled off and on unless a firmware  
update is performed before the power cycle.  
N
N
Hard reset does not clear the current configuration.  
1. If necessary, turn off power to the switcher.  
2.  
Press and hold the Reset button on the rear panel while you apply AC power  
to the switcher (figure 3-71).  
Press and hold the Reset button while you apply power to the switcher.  
Rx  
RESET  
Power  
The switcher flashes the front panel button  
indicators green, red, and amber and then turns them off.  
Continue to hold the Reset button until all input and output buttons return  
to either unlit or to background illumination and the RGBHV or Video and  
Audio buttons turn on.  
Rx  
Release the Reset button.  
RESET  
Figure 3-71 — Hard reset  
Optimizing the Audio (Systems with Audio BMEs)  
Each individual input audio level can be adjusted within a range of -18 dB to  
+24 dB, so there are no noticeable volume differences between sources and for the  
best headroom and signal-to-noise ratio. Adjust the audio gain and attenuation as  
follows:  
1.  
Connect audio sources to all desired inputs and connect the audio outputs to  
output devices such as audio players. See Audio input and output (systems with  
audio BMEs), in chapter 2, Installation. For best results, wire all of the inputs  
and the outputs balanced.  
2.  
3.  
Power on the audio sources, the switcher, and the audio players.  
Switch among the inputs (see Creating a configuration, in this chapter), listening  
to the audio with a critical ear or measuring the output audio level with test  
equipment, such as a VU meter.  
4.  
5.  
As necessary, adjust the input audio level of each input (see Viewing and  
adjusting the input audio level (systems with audio BMEs), in this chapter) so that  
the approximate output level is the same for all selected inputs.  
As necessary, adjust the output audio level of each input (see Viewing and  
adjusting the output volume (systems with audio BMEs), in this chapter).  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-45  
Operation, cont’d  
Troubleshooting  
This section gives recommendations on what to do if you have problems operating  
the CrossPoint 450 Plus or MAV Plus switcher, and it describes an actual image  
problem that Extron has encountered.  
General checks  
1.  
Ensure that all devices are plugged in and powered on. The switcher is  
receiving power if one of the front panel Power Supply LEDs is lit green.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
5.  
6.  
Check to see if one or more outputs are muted.  
Ensure an active input is selected for output on the switcher.  
Ensure that the proper signal format is supplied.  
Check the cabling and make corrections as necessary.  
Call the Extron S3 Sales & Technical Support Hotline if necessary.  
Plasma display S-video problem  
(CrossPoint 450 Plus wideband BMEs only)  
Extron has encountered a problem when a CrossPoint 450 Plus wideband switcher  
BME routes S-video that is output by some video conference codecs. Some codecs  
change the DC offset on the chrominance (C) so that it is very different from the  
level on the luminance (Y). This can cause a plasma display to come up in the  
wrong size mode.  
With the matrix switcher taken out of the system, the plasma works fine. It looks  
like a problem with the matrix switcher, but it is not. The matrix switcher boosts  
the bad codec output, which makes the plasma go to the wrong setting.  
Solution: Try placing an Extron video DC block adapter, part #26-495-01, on the  
luminance (Y) input to the switcher from the codec.  
Configuration Worksheets  
Rather than trying to remember the configuration for each preset, use worksheets to  
record this information. Make copies of the blank worksheet on page 3-51 and use  
one for each preset configuration. The worksheet accommodates all of the matrix  
sizes available with the CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus models documented  
in this manual. Cross out all unused or inactive inputs and outputs. Use different  
colors for video and audio.  
Worksheet example 1: System equipment  
Figure 3-72 shows a worksheet for a 48-input by 32-output system in a fictional  
organization with the system hardware annotated. Inputs 10, 11, 25, 30, 35, 40, and  
45 through 48 have no connections in this organization, so they have been crossed  
out on the worksheet. Inputs 49 through 64 do not exist on this model, so they are  
crossed out. Similarly, outputs 7, 14, 15, 16, and 33 through 64 are crossed out.  
Inputs include PCs, an audio CD player, cameras, and an Extron VTG 450. Output  
devices include monitors, front and rear projectors, a stereo, and a VCR for  
recording presentations.  
The Extron VTG 450 video test generator connected to input 12 enables a video  
test pattern to be sent to one, several, or all output devices for problem isolation or  
adjustment purposes. An audio test tape or CD could be used in a similar manner  
to check out the audio components.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation  
3-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Input sources  
Camera Camera Podium  
Laptop  
Audio  
CD  
Classrm Classrm  
PC1  
Rack DVD  
(DVS)  
VTG  
450  
Floorbox Floorbox Floorbox Floorbox  
main  
#2  
mic  
RGB 201  
#1 VCR #2 VCR RGB 201  
DVS 406 DVS 406  
#1-1  
#1-2  
#1-3  
#1-4  
podium  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
Demo rk Demo rk Demo rk Demo rk  
Floorbox Floorbox Floorbox Floorbox  
Floorbox Floorbox Floorbox Floorbox  
Floorbox Floorbox  
#1  
#2  
#3  
#4  
#2-1  
#2-2  
#2-3  
#2-4  
#3-1  
#3-2  
#3-3  
#3-4  
#4-1  
#4-2  
USP 405 USP 405 USP 405 USP 405  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
40  
56  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
46  
62  
31  
32  
Demo rk Demo rk Demo rk Demo rk  
#5 #6 #7 #8  
USP 405 USP 405 USP 405 USP 405  
Floorbox Floorbox  
Floorbox Floorbox Floorbox Floorbox  
#4-3  
#4-4  
#5-1  
#5-2  
#5-3  
#5-4  
33  
34  
35  
51  
36  
37  
38  
39  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
61  
47  
63  
48  
64  
49  
50  
52  
53  
54  
55  
57  
58  
59  
60  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
Main  
hall  
Main  
hall  
Podium  
Conf.  
room  
Sound  
VCR  
Lobby  
Class  
Class  
Demo  
Demo  
rack  
Demo  
rack  
monitor  
system (USP 405)  
#2  
monitor room #1 room #2 room  
PJ#1  
PJ#2  
monitor monitor  
PJ#!  
monitor switcher  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
Demo  
Demo  
Demo  
Demo  
Demo  
Demo  
Demo  
Demo  
Demo  
Demo  
Demo  
Demo  
Demo  
Demo  
Demo  
Demo  
wallbox wallbox wallbox wallbox  
wallbox wallbox wallbox wallbox wallbox wallbox wallbox wallbox  
wallbox wallbox wallbox wallbox  
#1-1  
#1-2  
#2-1  
#2-2  
#3-1  
#3-2  
#4-1  
#4-2  
#5-1  
#5-2  
#6-1  
#6-2  
#7-1  
#7-2  
#8-1  
#8-2  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
Output destinations  
Preset #  
Title:  
Fill in the preset number and use colors, or dashes, etc. to make connecting lines. Indicate if the configuration is for Video, Audio, or both.  
Figure 3-72 — Worksheet example 1: System equipment  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-47  
Operation, cont’d  
Worksheet example 2: Daily configuration  
Figure 3-73 continues from worksheet example 1 by showing the video and audio  
ties that make up the configuration of preset 1. A solid ink line shows video ties  
and a dashed pencil line shows the audio ties.  
Large matrix sizes can become very complex. Extron suggests using various  
colors of ink and/or pencil and careful routing of drawn lines for ease of tracking  
connection lines.  
N
In this example:  
•
The image of the presenter, from the main podium camera (input 1), is  
displayed:  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
In the main hall (output 1)  
In the conference room (output 4) to the overflow crowd  
In the lobby (output 8)  
Tied to the VCR (output 6)  
•
•
The presenter has a presentation on her laptop computer (input 4) that is scan  
converted and displayed:  
ꢀ
In the main hall (output 2)  
ꢀ
Locally on the podium (output 3)  
The audio from her microphone (input 3) is played:  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
In the hall (output 1)  
In the conference room (output 4)  
Sent to the VCR (output 6)  
•
Classical music from the CD player (input 5) is played:  
ꢀ
In the background in the main hall on sound system #2 (output 5)  
In the lobby (output 8)  
ꢀ
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation  
3-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Input sources  
Camera Camera Podium  
Laptop  
Audio  
CD  
Classrm Classrm  
PC1  
Rack DVD  
(DVS)  
VTG  
450  
Floorbox Floorbox Floorbox Floorbox  
main  
#2  
mic  
RGB 201  
#1 VCR #2 VCR RGB 201  
DVS 406 DVS 406  
#1-1  
#1-2  
#1-3  
#1-4  
podium  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
Demo rk Demo rk Demo rk Demo rk  
Floorbox Floorbox Floorbox Floorbox  
Floorbox Floorbox Floorbox Floorbox  
Floorbox Floorbox  
#1  
#2  
#3  
#4  
#2-1  
#2-2  
#2-3  
#2-4  
#3-1  
#3-2  
#3-3  
#3-4  
#4-1  
#4-2  
USP 405 USP 405 USP 405 USP 405  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
40  
56  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
46  
62  
31  
32  
Demo rk Demo rk Demo rk Demo rk  
#5 #6 #7 #8  
USP 405 USP 405 USP 405 USP 405  
Floorbox Floorbox  
Floorbox Floorbox Floorbox Floorbox  
#4-3  
#4-4  
#5-1  
#5-2  
#5-3  
#5-4  
33  
34  
35  
51  
36  
37  
38  
39  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
61  
47  
63  
48  
64  
49  
50  
52  
53  
54  
55  
57  
58  
59  
60  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
Main  
hall  
Main  
hall  
Podium  
Conf.  
room  
Sound  
VCR  
Lobby  
Class  
Class  
Demo  
Demo  
rack  
Demo  
rack  
monitor  
system (USP 405)  
#2  
monitor room #1 room #2 room  
PJ#1  
PJ#2  
monitor monitor  
PJ#!  
monitor switcher  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
Demo  
Demo  
Demo  
Demo  
Demo  
Demo  
Demo  
Demo  
Demo  
Demo  
Demo  
Demo  
Demo  
Demo  
Demo  
Demo  
wallbox wallbox wallbox wallbox  
wallbox wallbox wallbox wallbox wallbox wallbox wallbox wallbox  
wallbox wallbox wallbox wallbox  
#1-1  
#1-2  
#2-1  
#2-2  
#3-1  
#3-2  
#4-1  
#4-2  
#5-1  
#5-2  
#6-1  
#6-2  
#7-1  
#7-2  
#8-1  
#8-2  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
Output destinations  
Preset #  
Title:  
Fill in the preset number and use colors, or dashes, etc. to make connecting lines. Indicate if the configuration is for Video, Audio, or both.  
Figure 3-73 — Worksheet example 2: Daily configuration  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-49  
Operation, cont’d  
Worksheet example 3: Test configuration  
The A/V system in our fictional organization needs to be fine tuned on a regular  
basis. Figure 3-74 shows a typical test configuration, with an Extron video test  
generator (input 12) generating a test pattern to all connected outputs. Sound  
checks are run from the CD player (input 5) to all output devices that accept audio  
(outputs 1, 2, 4, 5, and 8).  
Input sources  
Camera Camera Podium  
Laptop  
Audio  
CD  
Classrm Classrm  
PC1  
Rack DVD  
(DVS)  
VTG  
450  
Floorbox Floorbox F  
main  
#2  
mic  
RGB 201  
#1 VCR #2 VCR RGB 201  
DVS 406 DVS 406  
#1-1  
#1-2  
podium  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
Demo rk Demo rk Demo rk Demo rk  
Floorbox Floorbox Floorbox Floorbox  
Floorbox Floorbox Floorbox Floorbox  
F
#1  
#2  
#3  
#4  
#2-1  
#2-2  
#2-3  
#2-4  
#3-1  
#3-2  
#3-3  
#3-4  
USP 405 USP 405 USP 405 USP 405  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
40  
56  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
46  
62  
Demo rk Demo rk Demo rk Demo rk  
#5 #6 #7 #8  
USP 405 USP 405 USP 405 USP 405  
Floorbox Floorbox  
Floorbox Floorbox Floorbox Floorbox  
#4-3  
#4-4  
#5-1  
#5-2  
#5-3  
#5-4  
33  
34  
35  
51  
36  
37  
38  
39  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
61  
49  
50  
52  
53  
54  
55  
57  
58  
59  
60  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
Main  
hall  
Main  
hall  
Podium  
Conf.  
room  
Sound  
VCR  
Lobby  
Class  
Class  
Demo  
Demo  
rack  
Demo  
rack  
monitor  
system (USP 405)  
#2  
monitor room #1 room #2 room  
PJ#1  
PJ#2  
monitor monitor  
PJ#!  
monitor switcher  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
Demo  
Demo  
Demo  
Demo  
Demo  
Demo  
Demo  
Demo  
Demo  
Demo  
Demo  
Demo  
Demo  
Demo  
wallbox wallbox wallbox wallbox  
wallbox wallbox wallbox wallbox wallbox wallbox wallbox wallbox  
wallbox wallbox  
w
#1-1  
#1-2  
#2-1  
#2-2  
#3-1  
#3-2  
#4-1  
#4-2  
#5-1  
#5-2  
#6-1  
#6-2  
#7-1  
#7-2  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
Output destinations  
Preset #  
Title:  
Fill in the preset number and use colors, or dashes, etc. to make connecting lines. Indicate if the configuration is for Video, Audio, or both.  
Figure 3-74 — Worksheet example 3: Test configuration  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation  
3-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation  
3-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation, cont’d  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation  
3-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers  
Chapter Four  
4
SIS Programming and Control  
RS-232 and RS-422 Links  
Ethernet Link  
Host-to-Switcher Instructions  
Switcher-Initiated Messages  
Switcher Error Responses  
Using the Command/Response Tables  
Command/Response Table for SIS Commands  
Command Response Table for IP SIS Commands  
Special Characters  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SIS™ Programming and Control  
RS-232 and RS-422 Links  
The switcher has two serial ports that can be connected to a host device such as a  
computer running the HyperTerminal utility, an RS-232 capable PDA, or a control  
system. These ports make serial control of the switcher possible. The two serial  
ports are:  
•
•
The rear panel Remote RS-232/RS-422 port, a 9-pin D female connector  
The front panel Configuration (RS-232) port, a 2.5 mm mini stereo jack  
The default protocol for both ports is as follows:  
•
•
9600 baud • no parity  
1 stop bit • no flow control  
• 8-bit  
Rear panel Remote port  
The rear panel Remote RS-232/RS-422 port (figure 4-1) can be configured for either  
RS-232 or RS-422. The port can operate at the 9600, 19200, 38400, or 115200 baud  
rate.  
The rear panel Remote RS-232/RS-422 port can be configured from the front  
panel or using Simple Instruction Set (SIS) commands. See Selecting the  
rear panel Remote port protocol and baud rate in chapter 3, Operation,  
to configure the port from the front panel. See the Set serial port parameters  
command on page 4-21 to configure the port using an SIS command.  
N
Pin RS-232Function  
RS-422 Function  
Not used  
TX– Transmit data (–)  
RX– Receive data (–)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
—
Not used  
—
1
5
TX Transmit data  
RX Receive data  
—
6
9
Not used  
—
Not used  
Gnd Signal ground Gnd Signal ground  
—
—
—
—
Not used  
Not used  
Not used  
Not used  
—
Not used  
RX+ Receive data (+)  
TX+ Transmit data (+)  
—
Not used  
Figure 4-1 — Remote connector pin assignments  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • SIS Programming and Control  
4-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Front panel Configuration port  
The front panel Configuration port is hard configured as RS-232 only. The port  
can operate at the 9600, 19200, 38400, or 115200 baud rate, but Extron recommends  
leaving this port at 9600 baud only.  
The front panel Configuration port can be configured using SIS commands only.  
See the Set serial port parameters command on page 4-21 to configure the port  
using an SIS command.  
N
The optional 9-pin D to 2.5 mm stereo mini TRS RS-232 cable, part #70-335-01  
(figure 4-2) can be used for connection to the Configuration port.  
6 feet  
(1.8 m)  
Part #70-335-01  
1
6
9
5
Tip  
Ring  
Sleeve (Gnd)  
9-pin D  
Connection  
TRS Plug  
Pin 2  
Pin 3  
Pin 5  
Computer's RX line  
Computer's TX line  
Computer's signal ground  
Tip  
Ring  
Sleeve  
Figure 4-2 — Optional 9-pin TRS RS-232 cable  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • SIS Programming and Control  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SIS™ Programming and Control, cont’d  
Ethernet Link  
The rear panel Ethernet connector on the switcher can be connected to an Ethernet  
LAN or WAN. This connection makes SIS control of the switcher possible using a  
computer connected to the same LAN or WAN.  
Ethernet connection  
The Ethernet cable can be terminated as a straight-through cable or a crossover  
cable and must be properly terminated for your application (figure 4-3).  
•
Crossover cable — Direct connection between the computer and the  
CrossPoint 450 Plus or MAV Plus switcher.  
•
Patch (straight) cable — Connection of the CrossPoint 450 Plus or MAV Plus  
switcher to an Ethernet LAN.  
Patch (straight) cable  
Side 1  
Side 2  
Pin  
1
Wire color  
Pin  
1
Wire color  
White-orange  
Orange  
White-orange  
Orange  
Side  
Clip Down  
2
2
Pins 12345678  
RJ-45  
3
White-green  
Blue  
3
White-green  
Blue  
connector  
4
4
5
White-blue  
Green  
5
White-blue  
Green  
6
6
7
White-brown  
Brown  
7
White-brown  
Brown  
8
8
12345678  
Crossover cable  
Side 1  
Side 2  
Pin  
1
Wire color  
White-orange  
Orange  
Pin  
1
Wire color  
White-green  
Green  
Twisted  
Pairs  
2
2
3
White-green  
Blue  
3
White-orange  
Blue  
1&2  
7&8  
4
4
3&6 4&5  
5
White-blue  
Green  
5
White-blue  
Orange  
6
6
7
White-brown  
Brown  
7
White-brown  
Brown  
8
8
Figure 4-3 — RJ-45 Ethernet connector pin assignments  
Default IP addresses  
To access the CrossPoint 450 Plus or MAV Plus switcher via the Ethernet port, you  
will need the Extron IP address, and may need the subnet mask and the gateway  
address. If the IP address has been changed to an address comprised of words and  
characters, the actual numeric IP address can be determined using the ping (ICMP)  
utility (see appendix A, Ethernet Connection, for more details). If the addresses have  
not been changed, the factory-specified defaults are:  
• IP address  
192.168.254.254  
• Subnet mask  
255.255.0.0  
• Gateway address 0.0.0.0  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • SIS Programming and Control  
4-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Host-to-Switcher Instructions  
The switcher accepts SIS commands through the RS-232/RS-422 port and Ethernet  
port. SIS commands consist of one or more characters per command field. They do  
not require any special characters to begin or end the command character sequence.  
Each switcher response to an SIS command ends with a carriage return and a line  
feed (CR/LF =  
is one or more characters.  
), which signals the end of the response character string. A string  
]
Switcher-Initiated Messages  
When a local event such as a front panel operation occurs, the switcher responds  
by sending a message to the host. The switcher-initiated messages are listed below  
(underlined).  
(C) Copyright 2006, Extron Electronics CP 450 MAV Plus, Vx.xx, nn-nnn-nn,  
date/time  
]
The switcher initiates the copyright message when it is first powered on or when  
connection via Internet protocol (IP) is established. “Vx.xx“ is the firmware version  
number. “nn-nnn-nn“ is the BME’s part number. “date/time“ is the date and time of  
the connection and is only reported when the connection is made via the IP port.  
Password:  
]
The switcher initiates the password message immediately after the copyright  
message when the controlling system is connected using TCP/IP or Telnet and the  
switcher is password protected. This message means that the switcher requires an  
administrator or user level password before it will perform the commands entered  
via this link. The switcher repeats the password message response for every entry  
other than a valid password until a valid password is entered.  
Login Administrator  
]
]
]
Login User  
]
The switcher initiates the login message when a correct administrator or user  
password has been entered. If the user and administrator passwords are the same,  
the switcher defaults to administrator privileges.  
Qik  
]
The switcher initiates the Qik message when a front panel switching operation has  
occurred.  
Sprnn  
]
The switcher initiates the Spr message when a memory preset has been saved from  
the front panel. “nn” is the preset number.  
Rprnn  
]
The switcher initiates the Rpr message when a memory preset has been recalled  
from the front panel. “nn” is the preset number.  
Innn Audxx  
]
The switcher initiates the Aud message when a front panel input audio level change  
has occurred. “nn” is the input number and “xx” is the dB level.  
Outnn Volxx  
]
The switcher initiates the Vol message when a front panel output audio volume  
change has occurred. “nn” is the output number and “xx” is the volume level.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • SIS Programming and Control  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SIS™ Programming and Control, cont’d  
•
Vmtnn x  
]
The switcher initiates the Vmt message when a video output mute is toggled on  
•
or off from the front panel. “nn” is the output number, is a space, and “x” is the  
mute status: 1 = on, 0 = off.  
•
Amtnn x  
]
The switcher initiates the Amt message when an audio output mute is toggled on  
•
or off from the front panel. “nn” is the output number, is a space, and “x” is the  
mute status: 1 = on, 0 = off.  
Exen  
]
The switcher initiates the Exe message when executive mode is toggled on or off  
from the front panel. “n” is the executive mode status: 1 = on, 0 = off.  
Switcher Error Responses  
When the switcher receives an SIS command and determines that it is valid, it  
performs the command and sends a response to the host device. If the switcher  
is unable to perform the command because the command is invalid or contains  
invalid parameters, the switcher returns an error response to the host. The error  
response codes are:  
E01 — Invalid input channel number (too large)  
E10 — Invalid command  
E11 — Invalid preset number  
E12 — Invalid output number (too large)  
E13 — Invalid value (out of range)  
E14 — Illegal command for this configuration  
E17 — Timeout (caused only by direct write of global presets)  
E21 — Invalid room number  
E24 — Privilege violation (Ethernet, Extron software only)  
Using the Command/Response Tables  
The command/response tables begin on page 4-8. Lower case letters are acceptable  
in the command field except where indicated for the gain and attenuation  
commands. The table below shows the hexadecimal equivalent of each ASCII  
character used in the command/response table.  
ASCII to HEX Conversion Table  
Space  
Symbols are used throughout the table to represent variables in the command/  
response fields. Command and response examples are shown throughout the table.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • SIS Programming and Control  
4-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Symbol definitions  
]
=
CR/LF (carriage return/line feed) (hex 0D 0A)  
}
•
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Carriage return (no line feed, hex 0D)  
Space character  
E
X!  
X@  
X#  
X$  
X%  
X^  
X&  
Escape key (hex 1B)  
Input number  
01 – (maximum number of inputs for your model)  
00 – (maximum number of inputs for your model) (00 = untied)  
01 – (maximum number of outputs for your model)  
–18 to +24 (45 steps of gain or attenuation)  
0 – 24 (1 dB/step)  
Input number (for tie)  
Output number  
Numeric dB value  
Audio gain  
Audio attenuation  
Volume adjustment range  
1 – 18 (1 dB/step)  
0 – 64 (1 dB/step except for 0-to-1, which is 34.5 dB)  
(see the table on page 4-11)  
X*  
10 max. (each can have up to 10 presets (X1@s) assigned)  
=
Room # (for room presets)  
A Room is a subset of operator-selected outputs that relate to each other. The switcher supports up to 10 rooms, each of which can consist  
N
of from 1 to 16 outputs.  
X(  
=
=
=
=
Mute, executive mode, power supply  
Group # (for I/O grouping)  
Global preset #  
(0 = off/not OK, 1 = on/OK)  
X1)  
X1!  
X1@  
1 through 4 groups (0 = no group)  
64 maximum (0 = current configuration)  
10 maximum (0 = current configuration for room)  
Room preset #  
A Room preset is a stored configuration with all of the outputs assigned to a single room. When a room preset is retrieved from memory,  
N
it becomes the current configuration.  
X1#  
X1$  
=
=
RGB delay interval  
Video/audio mute:  
Delay in ½ second increments (10 maximum)  
0 = no mutes  
1 = video mute  
2 = audio mute  
3 = video and audio mute  
xxx.xx (frequency in Hz (V) or kHz (H))  
0 = no input detected, 1 = input detected)  
X1%  
X1^  
X1&  
X1*  
=
=
=
=
Sync frequency  
Signal detection  
Firmware version number to second decimal place (x.xx)  
BME type  
1 = wideband video  
2 = low resolution video  
3 = Sync  
4 = stereo audio  
5 = Mono audio  
X1(  
X2)  
X2!  
=
=
=
# of connected BMEs in the system  
1 through 6  
Verbose firmware version-description-upload date/time. See page 4-18.  
Name 12 characters maximum for global, room preset, input, and output names  
11 characters maximum for room names  
Upper- and lower-case alphanumeric characters and  
_ : = / and spaces are valid.  
The following characters are invalid in the name: {space} ~ , @ = ‘ [ ] { } < > ’ “ ; : | \ and ?.  
N
X2@  
X2#  
X2$  
=
=
=
Voltage  
Positive or negative voltage and magnitude  
Temperature  
Fan speed  
Degrees Fahrenheit  
RPM  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • SIS Programming and Control  
4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SIS™ Programming and Control, cont’d  
Command/response table for SIS commands  
Command  
ASCII command  
Response  
Additional  
description  
(host to switcher)  
(switcher to host)  
Create ties  
• Commands can be entered back-to-back in a string, with no spaces. For example: 1*1!02*22&023*064%4*8$.  
N
The quick multiple tie and tie input to all output commands activate all I/O switches simultaneously.  
The matrix switchers support 1-, 2-, and 3-digit numeric entries (1*1, 02*02, or 003*003).  
•
•
X@to output X#, X@ X#  
X#• X@• ]  
X@  
Tie input ‘s video and  
Tie input  
video (V) and audio (A)  
*
!
Out  
In  
All  
X#  
.
audio to output  
Example:  
1*3!  
Tie input 1 video and audio  
to output 3.  
•
• ]  
Out03 In01 All  
X@to output X#,  
Tie input  
RGBHV only  
X@ X#  
X#• X@• ]  
RGB  
Video breakaway.  
*
&
Out  
In  
Example (see Note):  
10*4&  
•
•
]
Tie input 10 RGB to output 4.  
Video breakaway.  
Out04 In10 RGB  
X@to output X#, X@ X#  
X#• X@• ]  
In Vid  
Tie input  
*
%
Out  
video only  
Example (see Note):  
7*5%  
Tie input 7 video to output 5.  
•
• ]  
Out05 In07 Vid  
The & tie command for RGB and the % tie command for video can be used interchangeably on the matrix switchers.  
N
Audio breakaway.  
X@to output X#, X@ X#  
X#• X@•  
]
Aud  
Tie input  
audio only  
*
$
Out  
]
Out04 In12 Aud  
In  
Example:  
12*4$  
Tie input 12 audio to output 4.  
•
•
Quick multiple tie  
Example:  
E X@ X# X@ X# }  
]
]
+Q  
*
!...  
*
$
Qik  
Qik  
Tie input 3 video and audio  
to output 4, tie input 3 video  
to output 5, and tie input 3  
audio to output 6.  
E
}
+Q3*4!3*5%3*6$  
Tie input to all outputs,  
V & A  
X@  
*!  
X@• ]  
All  
In  
Example:  
5*!  
Tie input 5 video and audio  
to all outputs.  
• ]  
In05 All  
Tie input to all outputs,  
RGBHV only  
Video breakaway.  
X@  
*&  
X@•  
]
In  
RGB  
Example (see Note):  
8*&  
Tie input 8 video to all  
outputs.  
•
]
In08 RGB  
Tie input to all outputs,  
video only  
Video breakaway.  
X@  
*%  
X@• ]  
Vid  
In  
Example (see Note):  
10*%  
Tie input 10 video to all  
outputs.  
• ]  
In10 Vid  
The & tie all command for RGB and the % tie all command for video can be used interchangeably on the matrix  
switchers.  
N
Tie input to all outputs,  
audio only  
Audio breakaway.  
X@  
*$  
X@•  
]
In  
Aud  
Read ties  
X@  
RGBHV input  
tied to  
output tie  
output tie  
Read RGB  
X#  
X#  
X@]  
X@]  
&
X#  
output  
.
Read video  
X@  
%
Video input  
tied to  
X#  
output  
.
The & read tie command for RGB and the % read tie command for video can be used interchangeably on the matrix  
N
switchers.  
output tie  
Read audio  
X#  
X@]  
X@  
Audio input tied to  
$
X#  
output  
.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • SIS Programming and Control  
4-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command/response table for SIS commands (continued)  
Command  
ASCII command  
Response  
Additional  
description  
(host to switcher)  
(switcher to host)  
Digital Sync Validation Processing (DSVP)  
Individual sync frequency  
Listed as horizontal  
frequency, vertical frequency.  
X!  
LS  
X1%X1%]  
,
Example:  
2LS  
Input 2 frequency is  
31.5 kHz (horizontal) and  
60 Hz (vertical).  
]
031.5,060.00  
The matrix switcher returns 000.00,000.00 if there is no connection or sync frequencies are not applicable.  
N
1
2
3
n
List input signal status for  
all inputs  
0LS  
X1^ X1^ X1^ X1^]  
X1^  
value is an input.  
,
,
, ... ,  
Each  
n is the highest-numbered  
input for this model.  
RGB / Video mute  
RGB/video mute  
Mute RGB or video,  
X#  
X#  
X#  
X# ]  
Vmt *1  
*1B  
*0B  
B
X#  
output  
(video off).  
RGB/video unmute  
Unmute RGB or video,  
X# ]  
Vmt *0  
X#  
output  
(video on).  
Read RGB/video mute  
Global RGB/video mute  
1 = mute on, 0 = mute off.  
X(]  
1*B  
Mute all RGB or video  
outputs.  
]
Vmt1  
Global RGB/video ummute 0*B  
Unmute all RGB or video  
outputs.  
]
Vmt0  
RGB delay  
Set RGB delay  
EX# X1# }  
X#• X1#]  
Dly  
*
D
Out  
Example:  
Set the RGB interval for  
switches to output 43 to 3.5  
seconds (7 x 0.5).  
E
}
•
]
43*7D  
Out43 Dly07  
Read RGB delay  
EX# }  
X1#]  
D
Example:  
Output 54 switching interval  
is 2.5 seconds (5 x 0.5).  
E }  
]
05  
54D  
Audio input gain and attenuation  
The set gain (G) and attenuation (g) commands are case sensitive.  
N
You can set the input level to whole dB values only, using the X! X%  
*
G command. The increment and decrement level  
(X!+G and X!-G) commands increase and decrease the level in steps of 0.5 dB only. The X$values for all audio gain  
and attenuation commands are reported in whole dB levels only; the reported X$value is rounded up to the next higher  
magnitude value (for example, 1.5 dB is reported as 2 dB and -3.5 dB is reported as -4 dB).  
Set input audio gain to  
+ dB value  
X! X%  
X!• X$]  
In Aud  
*
G
Example:  
1*2G  
Set input 1 audio gain to  
+2 dB.  
•
]
In01 Aud+02  
Set input audio attenuation  
to - dB value  
Increment level  
X! X^  
X!• X$]  
Aud  
*
g
In  
In  
Increase audio level by 0.5 dB.  
X!  
+G  
X!• X$]  
Aud  
Example:  
55+G  
Increment audio input 55  
level from +2 dB to +2.5 dB.  
Decrease audio level by 0.5 dB.  
•
]
In55 Aud+03  
Decrement level  
X!  
-G  
X!• X$]  
Aud  
In  
Example:  
7-G  
Decrement audio input 7  
level from -08 dB to -8.5 dB.  
• ]  
In07 -09  
Read input gain  
X!  
G
X$]  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • SIS Programming and Control  
4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SIS™ Programming and Control, cont’d  
Command/response table for SIS commands (continued)  
Command  
ASCII command  
Response  
Additional  
description  
(host to switcher)  
(switcher to host)  
Audio output volume  
The table on the next page defines the value of each audio volume step.  
N
You can set the output volume to whole dB values only, using the X# X&  
*
V command. The increment and decrement  
N
level (X#+V and X#-V) commands increase and decrease the volume in steps of 0.5 dB only. The X&values for all  
audio output volume commands are reported in whole dB levels only; the reported X&value is rounded up to the next  
higher magnitude value (for example, 3.5 dB is reported as 4 dB.  
Set audio volume to a  
specific value  
Example:  
X# X&  
X#• X&]  
Vol  
*
V
Out  
1*50v  
Set output 1 volume to 79%.  
Increase volume by 0.5 dB.  
•
]
Out01 Vol50  
Increment value  
X#  
X#• X&]  
Vol  
+V  
Out  
Example:  
1+V  
Increment audio volume  
0.5 dB, from 79% to 80.5%.  
Decrease volume by 0.5 dB.  
•
]
Out01 Vol51  
Decrement volume  
Read output volume  
X#  
X#  
X#• X&]  
Vol  
-V  
Out  
X&]  
V
Audio mute  
Audio mute  
X#  
X#  
X#  
X# ]  
X#  
*1Z  
*0Z  
Z
Amt *1  
Mute audio output  
(audio off).  
Audio unmute  
X# ]  
Amt *0  
X#  
Unmute audio output  
(audio on).  
1 = mute on, 0 = mute off.  
Mute all audio outputs.  
Unmute all audio outputs.  
Read audio mute  
X(]  
Global audio mute  
Global audio ummute  
1*Z  
]
]
Amt1  
0*Z  
Amt0  
Names  
Write global preset name  
EX1!X2! }  
X1!X2!]  
,
NG  
Nmg  
,
Example:  
Name global preset 1  
“Security 1”.  
E
}
]
]
1,Security 1NG  
Nmg01,Security 1  
Read global preset name  
Example:  
EX1! }  
X2!]  
]
Security 2  
NG  
E }  
2NG  
Write room name  
Example:  
EX*X2! }  
X*X2!]  
,
NR  
Nmr  
,
Name room 1 “Classrm 1”.  
E
}
1,Classrm 1NR  
Nmr01,Classrm 1  
Read room name  
Write room preset name  
Example:  
EX* }  
X2!]  
NR  
EX* X1@X2! }  
X* X1@X2!]  
Nmp  
*
,
NP  
*
,
E
}
]
Nmp01*03,Podium_DVD  
1*2,Podium_DVDNP  
Name room 1, preset 3  
“Podium_DVD”.  
Read room preset name  
EX* X2! }  
X2!]  
*
NP  
•
•
•
If a preset is unassigned, then X2!displays [unassigned].  
If a global preset is saved, but not yet named, the default name is Preset  
N
•X1!.  
X*• X1@.  
If a room preset is saved, but not yet named, the default name is RM  
Prst  
Write input name  
EX!X2! }  
X!X2!]  
,
NI  
Nmi  
,
Example:  
Name input 1 “Podium cam”.  
Name output 1 “Main PJ1”.  
E
EX! }  
EX#X2! }  
}
]
Nmi01,Podium cam  
X2!]  
1,Podium cam1NI  
Read input name  
Write output name  
Example:  
NI  
X#X2!]  
,
NO  
Nmo  
,
E
}
]
Nmo01,Main PJ1  
1,Main PJ1NO  
Read output name  
EX# }  
X2!]  
NO  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • SIS Programming and Control  
4-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Audio output volume settings table  
dB of  
Output  
dB of  
Output  
dB of  
Output  
X7 value  
X7 value  
X7 value  
attenuation volume  
attenuation volume  
attenuation volume  
00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
98  
63  
62  
61  
60  
59  
58  
57  
56  
55  
54  
53  
52  
51  
50  
49  
48  
47  
46  
45  
44  
43  
42  
0%  
5.5%  
7%  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
41  
40  
39  
38  
37  
36  
35  
34  
33  
32  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
38.5%  
40%  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
71.5%  
73%  
8.5%  
10%  
41.5%  
43%  
74.5%  
76%  
11.5%  
13%  
44.5%  
46%  
77.5%  
79%  
14.5%  
16%  
47.5%  
49%  
80.5%  
82%  
17.5%  
19%  
50.5%  
52%  
83.5%  
85%  
20.5%  
22%  
53.5%  
55%  
86.5%  
88%  
8
23.5%  
25%  
56.5%  
58%  
7
89.5%  
91%  
6
26.5%  
28%  
59.5%  
61%  
5
92.5%  
94%  
4
29.5%  
31%  
62.5%  
64%  
3
95.5%  
97%  
2
32.5%  
34%  
65.5%  
67%  
1
98.5%  
100%  
0
35.5%  
37%  
68.5%  
70%  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • SIS Programming and Control  
4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SIS™ Programming and Control, cont’d  
Command/response table for SIS commands (continued)  
Command  
ASCII command  
Response  
Additional  
description  
(host to switcher)  
(switcher to host)  
I/O grouping  
Write input grouping  
1
2
3
n
EX1)X1)X1) X1) }  
X1)  
entry is the group  
...  
I
Each  
1
2
3
n
number assigned to an input  
position, starting from input 1.  
n is the highest numbered  
input for this model.  
X1)X1)X1) X1)]  
Gri  
...  
If verbose mode is off (see the Verbose mode SIS command), the Gri preface is omitted in the response.  
N
Example for MAV Plus 3264:  
See below  
E
}
40 ... 33I  
Input 1 in group 4  
Response #s = group: Gri  
Input 2 not grouped  
Input 32 in group 3  
4
0
1
3
3
0
0
0
0
4
4
4
4
1
1
2
2
1
2
2
3
3
3
3
2
1
2
2
3
3
3
3
Input: 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32  
1
2
3
n
1
2
3
n
Write output grouping  
EX1)X1)X1) X1) }  
X1)X1)X1) X1)]  
X1)  
Each entry is the group  
...  
O
Gro  
...  
number assigned to an  
output position, starting  
from output 1. n is the  
highest number output for  
this model.  
If verbose mode is off (see the Verbose mode SIS command), the Gro preface is omitted in the response.  
N
1
2
3
n
Read input grouping  
E}  
X1)X1)X1) X1)]  
X1)  
One entry for each  
I
...  
input, starting from input 1.  
n is the highest numbered  
input for this model.  
Example for CrossPoint Plus 4848:  
See below  
E}  
I
Input 1 in group 1  
Input 9 not grouped  
Input 48 in group 3  
Response = group:  
1
1
1
3
3
0
0
0
0
4
4
4
4
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
3
3
2
1
2
2
3
3
3
Input: 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 4748  
1
2
3
n
Read output grouping  
E }  
X1)X1)X1) X1)]  
X1)  
One entry for each  
O
...  
output, starting from output 1.  
n is the highest numbered  
output for this model.  
For all of the above I/O grouping commands, the group that is assigned (X1)) must be 1, 2, 3, 4, or 0. 0 = (not grouped).  
N
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • SIS Programming and Control  
4-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command/response table for SIS commands (continued)  
Command  
ASCII command  
Response  
Additional  
description  
(host to switcher)  
(switcher to host)  
Save, recall, and directly write presets  
• If the user tries to recall a preset that is not saved, the matrix switcher responds with the error code E11.  
N
If the room is nonexistent, the matrix switcher responds with the error code E21.  
•
•
The following characters are invalid in preset names: + ~ , @ = ‘ [ ] { } < > ’ “ ; : | \ and ?.  
Save current the current  
configuration as a global  
preset  
Command character is a  
comma.  
X1!  
X1!]  
,
Spr  
Example:  
9,  
Save current ties as preset 9.  
]
Spr09  
Direct write process —  
The direct write of a global preset command should always be preceded by a clear global preset command of that  
same preset number, as shown below. In a directly-written preset, each output position’s tied input (or no tied output)  
remains unchanged unless overwritten or cleared.  
N
If you do not clear a global preset number before you directly write a global preset to that number, ties that are part of  
the previous version of the specified preset can unexpectedly become part of the newly-created preset.  
Clear a global preset  
E X1! }  
X1!]  
X1!  
Clear all ties in preset .  
+
P0*!  
Spr  
Directly write a global  
preset  
Enter as many ties as are  
valid for this model. The  
E X1! X@ X#X@ X# X@ X# X@ X# }  
+
P
*
!
*
%
*
$ ...  
*
&
X1!]  
Spr  
tie all (!), tie RGBHV (&), tie  
video (%), and tie audio ($)  
commands are all valid.  
Brackets are shown to  
separate ties for clarity only.  
Create global preset 27,  
which ties video and audio  
input 22 to output 5,  
Example:  
E
E
}
]
]
+27P0*!  
Spr27  
+27P22*5!15*29%13*26$3*8&  
Spr27  
RGBHV input 15 to output 29,  
video input 13 to output 26,  
and audio input 3 to output 8.  
Command character is a  
period.  
Recall a global preset  
X1!  
X1!]  
X1!]  
.
Rpr  
Example:  
5.  
Recall preset 5, which  
becomes the current  
Rpr  
configuration.  
Write room outputs  
See notes.  
EX*Y!Y@Y# Y/ }  
,
,
,
, ..., MR  
X*Y!Y@Y# Y/]  
Mpr  
,
,
,
, ...,  
• Each Y`is an output.  
N
A room can contain a maximum of 16 outputs (Y`s).  
An output can belong to one room only.  
•
•
•
•
The maximum number of rooms (X*) is 10.  
If no room name is assigned, the dafault name is “Room #X*•Y!,•Y@,•Y#”.  
Example:  
Outputs 3, 4, 5, and 6 are  
assigned to room 8.  
E
}
]
Mpr8,03,04,05,06  
8,3,04,5,6MR  
Read room outputs  
EX* }  
X2!Y!Y@Y# Y/]  
, ...,  
MR  
,
,
,
Example:  
Outputs 1, 2, 8, and 9 are  
assigned to room 3, which is  
named “Class 1”.  
E }  
]
Class 1,01,02,08,09  
3MR  
Save current configuration  
as a room preset  
Example:  
Command character is a  
comma.  
Save the current  
configuration as preset 9 for  
room 3.  
X* X1@  
X*• X1@]  
Spr  
*
,
Rmm  
3*9,  
•
]
Rmm03 Spr09  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • SIS Programming and Control  
4-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SIS™ Programming and Control, cont’d  
Command/response table for SIS commands (continued)  
Command  
ASCII command  
Response  
Additional  
description  
(host to switcher)  
(switcher to host)  
Save, recall, and directly write presets (continued)  
Directly write a room preset  
Enter as many ties as are  
valid for this model. The  
tie all (!), tie RGBHV (&), tie  
video (%), and tie audio ($)  
commands are all valid.  
Brackets are shown to  
separate ties for clarity only.  
Create preset 3 for room 7,  
which ties audio input 12 to  
output 7, video input 13 to  
output 35, RGBHV input 4  
to output 26, and video and  
audio input 6 to output 6.  
E X* X1@ X@ X#X@ X# X@ X# X@ X# }  
+
*
P
*
!
*
%
*
$ ...  
*
&
X* X1@]  
Rmm •Spr  
Example:  
Esc  
+7*3P12*7&13*35$4*26%6*6!  
Rmm07•Spr03]  
Recall a room preset  
X* X1@  
X*• X1@]  
Rpr  
*
.
Rmm  
Front panel security lockout (Executive mode)  
Lock front panel  
Unlock front panel  
View front panel lock  
Resets  
1X  
0X  
X
Enable Executive mode.  
Disable Executive mode.  
]
Exe1  
]
Exe0  
X(]  
Reset global presets and  
names  
Reset and individual global  
preset  
Clear all global presets and  
their names.  
E }  
]
ZG  
Zpg  
Zpg  
Zpd  
EX1! }  
X1!]  
X1!  
Clear global preset .  
ZG  
Reset RGB delays  
Reset all RGB delays to  
0.0 seconds.  
E }  
]
ZD  
Reset audio input levels  
Reset audio output levels  
Reset all audio input levels  
(gain and attenuation) to 0 dB.  
Reset all audio output  
levels (volume) to 100%  
(no attenuation).  
E }  
]
]
ZA  
Zpa  
E }  
ZV  
Zpv  
Reset all mutes  
Reset all video and audio  
mute.  
E }  
]
Zpz  
ZZ  
Reset room map  
Clear all room presets  
E }  
]
X*]  
X* X1@]  
ZR  
Zpr  
Zpr  
Zpp  
Reset individual room  
EX* }  
X*  
Clear all presets for room .  
Reset individual room preset  
and name.  
ZR  
Reset individual room  
preset  
EX* X1@ }  
*
ZP  
*
Reset flash  
Reset flash memory  
(erase user-supplied files).  
Clear all ties and presets,  
resets all audio gains to 0 dB,  
and resets the volume to  
100%.  
Similar to Reset whole  
switcher, plus sets the IP  
address to 192.168.254.254  
and the subnet mask to  
255.255.0.0.  
E
E
]
]
Zpf  
ZFFF  
Reset whole switcher  
Absolute reset  
}
]
ZXXX  
Zpx  
E
}
]
Zpq  
ZQQQ  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • SIS Programming and Control  
4-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command/response table for SIS commands (continued)  
Command  
ASCII command  
Response  
Additional  
description  
(host to switcher)  
(switcher to host)  
View ties, gain, volume, mutes, presets, and DSVP  
View RGBHV output tie  
X#  
X@]  
&
Example:  
25&  
Input 37 RGBHV tied to  
output 25.  
]
37  
View video output tie  
Example:  
X#  
7%  
X@]  
%
Input 2 video tied to output 7.  
Input 6 audio tied to output 3.  
Gain for input 4 is -2 dB.  
]
02  
View audio output tie  
Example:  
X#  
X@]  
$
3$  
]
06  
View input gain  
Example:  
X@  
G
X$]  
4G  
]
-02  
View output volume  
Example:  
X@  
7V  
X&]  
V
Volume for output 7 is  
attenuated by 9 dB (86.5%).  
]
55  
1
2
3
n
View output mutes  
E }  
X1$X1$X1$ X1$]  
X1$  
Each response is the  
VM  
...  
mute status of an output,  
starting from output 1. n is  
the highest numbered output  
for this model  
Example:  
E }  
]
VM  
0 00 01 0 00 0 00 23 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 00  
(CrossPoint 450 Plus 6432)  
Output 5 video is muted,  
output 12 audio is muted,  
and output 13 video and  
audio are muted. All other  
outputs are unmuted.  
n
n+1  
n+2  
n+15  
View video global preset  
configuration  
EX1! X#  
}
X@•X@ •X@ • •X@ • ]  
... Vid  
*
*1VC  
X1!  
Show preset  
’s video  
configuration. Show the  
video input tied to 16  
sequential outputs, starting  
X#  
from output  
.
Command description:  
Response description:  
Example:  
Preset# * starting output# (StO#) * 1(=video) VC  
]
Input# (I#) tied to StO#•I# tied to StO#+1•StO#+2•StO#+3• ... •StO#+15•Vid  
E
}
4*17*1VC  
input 34 tied to output 19 no tied input input 8 tied to output 29  
Response = tied input: 08•08•34•08•08•49•49•00•08•01•01•01•08•08•08•08•Vid  
Output: 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32  
Each position show in the response is an output: left = starting, right = starting output+15. The number in each  
position is the input tied to that output.  
Video — Input 1 is tied to outputs 26 through 28; input 8 to outputs 17, 18, 20, 21, 25, and 29 through 32; input 34 to  
output 19; and input 49 to outputs 22 and 23. No input is tied to output 24.  
EX1! X#  
}
where X1!= 0 returns the switcher’s current video configuration.  
*
*1VC  
N
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • SIS Programming and Control  
4-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SIS™ Programming and Control, cont’d  
Command/response table for SIS commands (continued)  
Command  
ASCII command  
Response  
Additional  
description  
(host to switcher)  
(switcher to host)  
View ties, gain, volume, mutes, presets, and DSVP (continued)  
n
n+1  
n+2  
n+15  
View audio global preset  
configuration  
EX1! X#  
}
X@•X@ •X@ • •X@ • ]  
... Aud  
*
*2VC  
X1!  
Show preset  
’s audio  
configuration. Show the  
audio input tied to 16  
sequential outputs, starting  
X#  
from output  
.
Command description:  
Response description:  
Example:  
Preset# * starting output# (StO#) * 2(=audio) VC  
]
Input# (I#) tied to StO#•I# tied to StO#+1•StO#+2•StO#+3• ... •StO#+15•Aud  
E
}
4*17*2VC  
input 1 tied to output 3  
no tied input  
input 58 tied to output 15  
Response = tied input: 01•01•01•01•02•22•22•00•03•03•03•03•60•60•58•58•Aud  
Output: 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
Each position show in the response is an output: left = starting, right = starting output+15. The number in each  
position is the input tied to that output.  
Audio — Input 1 is tied to outputs 1 through 4, input 2 is tied to output 5, input 3 is tied to outputs 9 through 12, and  
input 22 is tied to outputs 6 and 7, input 58 is tied to outputs 15 and 16, input 60 is tied to outputs 13 and 14, and no  
input is tied to output 8.  
EX1! X#  
View video room preset  
configuration  
}
EX* X1@  
where X1!= 0 returns the switcher’s current audio configuration.  
*
*2VC  
N
n
n+1  
n+2  
n+15  
}
X@•X@ •X@ • •X@ • ]  
...  
*
*1*1VC  
Vid  
X*  
X1@  
’s  
Show room , preset  
video configuration. Show  
the video input tied to up to  
16 outputs assigned to room  
X*  
.
Command description:  
Room#* room preset#* starting output# (recommended value = 1) * 1(=video) VC  
•
•
•
The matrix switcher responds to the View video room preset configuration command with a series of responses,  
each reporting the inputs tied to 16 outputs.  
N
These responses should then be compared to a list of the outputs assigned to the specified room to determine the ties in  
the room preset.  
For ease of understanding the starting output number should always be “1”.  
Response description:  
•
• • •  
• ]  
Input# (I#) tied to O#1 I# tied to O#2 O#3 O#4 ... •O#16 Vid  
•
•
•
• •  
• ]  
Input# (I#) tied to O#17 I# tied to O#18 O#19 O#20 ... O#32 Vid  
•
•
•
• •  
• ]  
Input# (I#) tied to O#33 I# tied to O#34 O#35 O#36 ... O#48 Vid  
•
•
•
• •  
• ]  
Input# (I#) tied to O#49 I# tied to O#50 O#51 O#52 ... O#64 Vid  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • SIS Programming and Control  
4-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command/response table for SIS commands (continued)  
Command  
ASCII command  
Response  
Additional  
description  
(host to switcher)  
(switcher to host)  
View ties, gain, volume, mutes, presets, and DSVP (continued)  
n
n+1  
n+2  
n+15  
View audio room preset  
configuration  
EX* X1@  
}
X@•X@ •X@ • •X@ • ]  
...  
*
*1*2VC  
Aud  
X*  
X1@  
’s  
Show room , preset  
audio configuration. Show  
the audio input tied to up to  
16 outputs assigned to room  
X*  
.
Command description:  
Room#* room preset#* starting output# (recommended value = 1) * 2 (=audio) VC  
•
•
•
The matrix switcher responds to the View audio room preset configuration command with a series of responses,  
each reporting the inputs tied to 16 outputs.  
N
These responses should then be compared to a list of the outputs assigned to the specified room to determine the ties in  
the room preset.  
For ease of understanding the starting output number should always be “1”.  
Response description:  
•
• • • •  
• ]  
Input# (I#) tied to O#1 I# tied to O#2 O#3 O#4 ... O#16 Aud  
•
•
•
• •  
• ]  
Input# (I#) tied to O#17 I# tied to O#18 O#19 O#20 ... O#32 Aud  
•
•
•
• •  
• ]  
Input# (I#) tied to O#33 I# tied to O#34 O#35 O#36 ... O#48 Aud  
•
•
•
• •  
• ]  
Input# (I#) tied to O#49 I# tied to O#50 O#51 O#52 ... O#64 Aud  
The response to the View file directory command differs, depending on whether the command is sent via an  
N
RS-232/RS-422 or Telnet connection or sent via a Web browser connection.  
View file directory  
RS-232/RS-422 and Telnet  
List user-supplied files.  
E }  
]
]
]
DF  
filename1,date/time,length  
filename2,date/time,length  
filename3,date/time,length  
•
•
•
•
]
filenamen,date/time,length  
• ]  
space_remaining Bytes left  
View file directory  
Web browser  
Var file = new array ();  
List user-supplied files.  
E }  
DF  
File [1] = ‘filename1,date1,filesize1’,  
File [2] = ‘filename2,date3,filesize2’,  
File [3] = ‘filename3,date3,filesize3’,  
•
•
•
•
File [n] = ‘filenamen,daten,filesizen’,  
File [n+1] = space_remaining Bytes•Left  
Erase user-supplied Web  
pages/files  
EfilenameEF  
}
]
Delfilename  
View DSVP  
(individual sync frequency)  
Listed as horizontal  
frequency, vertical frequency.  
X!  
LS  
X1%X1%]  
,
Example:  
2LS  
Input 2 frequency is  
31.5 kHz (horizontal) and  
60 Hz (vertical).  
]
031.5,060.00  
The matrix switcher returns 000.00,000.00 if there is no connection or sync frequencies are not applicable.  
N
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • SIS Programming and Control  
4-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SIS™ Programming and Control, cont’d  
Command/response table for SIS commands (continued)  
Command  
ASCII command  
Response  
Additional  
description  
(host to switcher)  
(switcher to host)  
Information requests  
Information request  
I
I
X@ X#• X@ X# X1* X1(]  
V
X
A
X
T
U
X@ X#  
V
A
X
X
= video size,  
= audio size  
X@ X#  
X1*  
T
U
= BME type  
X1(  
= number of BMEs in  
system.  
Example:  
•
• • ]  
V64X48 A64X48 T2 U2  
(MAV 450 Plus 6448  
with a connected audio  
BME)  
This low resolution matrix  
switcher (T2) has 64 video  
and 64 audio inputs by 48  
video and 48 audio inputs.  
This is a two BME system  
(a video and and audio BME).  
See appendix A for numbers.  
Request part number  
N
N
nn-nnn-nn  
Example:  
60-768-41  
CrossPoint 450 Plus 6464  
with front panel controller.  
There are up to three separate sets of Extron firmware that the switcher can report on: the CrossPoint/MAV Plus  
controller firmware, which is the overall control firmware; the Ethernet protocol firmware, which handles the Ethernet  
interface; and the latest optional Extron firmware update, which is available at www.Extron.com.  
N
Query controller firmware  
version  
Q
X1&]  
Example:  
Q
The factory-installed  
]
1.23  
CrossPoint Plus / MAV Plus  
controller firmware version  
is 1.23 (sample value only).  
Provide a detailed  
Query software version  
(verbose)  
0Q  
X1&X2)X2)]  
-
-
status of the Ethernet  
protocol firmware, the  
CrossPoint 450 Plus /  
MAV Plus controller  
firmware, and any firmware  
upgrade. The firmware that  
is running is marked by  
an asterisk (*). A caret (^)  
indicates that the firmware  
has a bad checksum or an  
invalid load. ?.?? indicates  
that the firmware is not  
loaded.  
]
Response description: Ethernet protocol firmware version - controller firmware version - updated firmware version  
Example:  
0Q  
Description  
* indicates the version running  
Upload date and time  
Response: 1.23-0.14(0.20-64x64 Series -Wed, 22 Feb 2006 00:00:00 GMT)-0.25*(0.24-64x64 Series -Thu, 16 Mar 2006 16:39:21 GMT)  
Ethernet protocol  
firmware  
CrossPoint/MAV firmware version  
Updated firmware version  
Request system status  
S
X2@•X2@•X2@•X2@•X2@•X2@•X2@•X2#•X2$•X2$•X(•X(]  
Response description:  
•
•
•
S
+5V +3.3V +2.5V Fan voltage•-5V•-12V•+12V Temp Fan1 RPM Fan2 RPM Primary PS Secondary PS]  
• •  
•
•
•
Example:  
Fans receiving 11.52 V Secondary power supply is on and Ok  
4.98•3.30•2.55•11.52•-5.21•-12.35•11.65•78.80•753•774•1•1  
5V power system at 4.98V  
Fan 1 rotating at 753 RPM  
If one of the variables is not applicable to a BME (such as fans for a video BME), the response for that variable is “---”.  
N
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • SIS Programming and Control  
4-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command/Response table for IP SIS commands  
Symbol definitions  
X3)  
=
Matrix name  
(Up to 240 characters)  
The following characters are invalid in the name: {space} ~ , @ = ` [ ] { } < > ‘ “ ; : \ | and ?.  
N
X3!  
X3@  
=
=
Default name  
Factory default name (model name + last 3 pairs of MAC address)  
Time and date (set)  
In the format: MM/DD/YY•HH:MM:SS where:  
MM = month: 01 (January) through 12 (December)  
DD = day: 01 through 31  
YY = year: 00 through 99  
HH = hour: 00 through 24  
MM = minutes: 00 through 59  
SS = seconds: 00 through 59  
X3#  
=
Time and date (read)  
In the format: Day,•DD•Mmm•YYYY•HH:MM:SS where  
Day = weekday: Mon through Sun  
DD = day: 01 through 31  
Mmm = month: Jan through Dec  
YYYY = year: 2000 through 2099  
HH = hour: 00 through 24  
MM = minutes: 00 through 59  
SS = seconds: 00 through 59  
X3$  
X3%  
=
=
GMT offset  
-12.0 through +14.0 (hours and minutes removed from GMT)  
Daylight Savings Time  
0 = Daylight Savings Time off/ignore  
1 = Daylight Savings Time on (northern hemisphere)  
2 = Daylight Savings Time on (Europe)  
3 = Daylight Savings Time on (Brazil)  
X3^  
X3&  
X3*  
X3(  
=
=
=
=
IP address  
###-###-###-###  
##-##-##-##-##-##  
0 - 255  
Hardware (MAC) address  
Number of open connections  
Password  
12 alphanumeric characters  
The following characters are invalid in passwords: {space} ~ , @ = ` [ ] { } < > ‘ “ ; : \ | and ?.  
N
X4)  
=
Domain name  
Standard domain name conventions apply (for example, xxx.com)  
The following characters are invalid in passwords: {space} ~ , = ` [ ] { } < > ‘ “ ; : \ | and ?  
N
The @ character is only acceptable as the lead-in to the domain name (such as @extron.com).  
X4!  
X4@  
X4#  
X4$  
=
=
-
E-mail account  
65 - 72. 65 = e-mail recipient #1, 66 = 2, 67 = 3, ... , 72 = recipient #8.  
E-mail address  
Typical e-mail address format (for example: [email protected])  
Notify when?  
0 = No response, 1 = fail/missing, 2 = fixed/restored, 3 = both 1 and 2  
=
Notification selections  
01 through 64 = input numbers  
98 = power supplies  
99 = fans  
X4%  
X4^  
X4&  
=
=
=
Notify status (for read)  
66-digit number. For each digit: 0 = do not notify, 1 = notify.  
0 = off, 1 = on  
DHCP  
Port #  
01 = rear panel Remote port  
02 = front panel Configuration port)  
X4*  
X4(  
X5)  
X5!  
X5@  
X5#  
=
=
=
=
=
=
Baud rate  
Parity  
9600, 19200, 38400, 115200  
Odd, even, none, mark, space (only first letter required)  
Data bits  
Stop bits  
Port type  
Verbose mode  
7, 8  
1, 2  
0 = RS-232, 1 = RS-422, 2 = RS-485  
0 = Clear/none (default for Telnet connection  
1 = Verbose mode (default for RS-232 / RS-422 connection)  
2 = Tagged responses for queries  
3 = Verbose mode and tagged for queries  
If tagged responses is enabled, all read commands return the constant string and the value as the set command does (for example, the read  
N
E
•X3)]  
}
matrix name command,  
CN , returns IPN  
).  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • SIS Programming and Control  
4-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SIS™ Programming and Control, cont’d  
X5$  
X5%  
=
Security level  
00 = Anonymous  
10 = Extended security levels 1 through 10  
11 = User  
12 = Administrator  
=
RAM status  
0 = RAM dirty (needs saving to flash)  
1 = RAM has been saved (ok to power off / reset)  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • SIS Programming and Control  
4-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command/response table for SIS commands (continued)  
Command/response table for IP SIS commands  
Command  
ASCII command  
Response  
Additional  
description  
(host to switcher)  
(switcher to host)  
Set matrix name (location)  
Read matrix name (location)  
EX3) }  
•X3)]  
Ipn  
CN  
E }  
X3)]  
•X3!]  
CN  
Reset matrix name to  
factory default  
E• }  
CN  
Ipn  
Set time and date  
EX3@ }  
X3@]  
CT  
Ipt  
Read time and date  
Set GMT offset  
E }  
X3#]  
CT  
The divider between  
hours and minutes is a  
period.  
EX3$ }  
X3$]  
CZ  
Ipz  
Read GMT offset  
E }  
X3$]  
CZ  
Set Daylight Savings Time  
Set the switcher to display  
the local time as Daylight  
Savings Time (+1 hour) in  
summer months.  
EX3% }  
X3%]  
CX  
Ipx  
Read Daylight Savings Time  
Set IP address  
E }  
X3%]  
CX  
EX3^ }  
X3^]  
CI  
Ipi  
Read IP address  
E }  
X3^]  
X3&]  
X3*]  
CI  
Read hardware address  
Read # of open connections  
Set subnet mask  
E }  
CH  
E }  
CC  
EX3^ }  
X3^]  
CS  
Ips  
Read subnet mask  
E }  
X3^]  
CS  
Set gateway IP address  
Read gateway IP address  
Set administrator password  
EX3^ }  
X3^]  
X3^]  
CG  
Ipg  
E }  
CG  
EX3( }  
•X3(]  
CA  
Ipa  
Read administrator  
password  
E }  
X3(]  
CA  
Reset (clear) administrator  
password  
E• }  
•X3(]  
CA  
Ipa  
Set user password  
EX3( }  
•X3(]  
CU  
Ipu  
Read user password  
E }  
X3(]  
CU  
Reset (clear) user password  
E• }  
•X3(]  
CU  
Ipu  
Set e-mail server,  
domainname  
EX3^X4)X3( }  
X3^X4)X3(]  
,
,
CM  
Ipm  
,
,
Read e-mail server,  
domainname  
E }  
X3^X4)X3(]  
CM  
,
,
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • SIS Programming and Control  
4-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SIS™ Programming and Control, cont’d  
Command/response table for SIS commands (continued)  
Command  
ASCII command  
Response  
Additional  
description  
(host to switcher)  
(switcher to host)  
The Set e-mail recipient (CR) command, sets the recipient for e-mail notifications. To turn e-mail notifications on, you  
must then set the events that the switcher reports using one of more separate Set e-mail events (EM) commands.  
N
Set e-mail recipient  
EX4!X4@ }  
X4@]  
,
CR  
Ipr  
,
Example:  
E
}
72,[email protected]  
•
]
Ipr [email protected],  
Read e-mail recipient  
EX4! }  
X4!]  
Ipr  
CR  
You must have first set an e-mail recipient for the e-mail account number (X4!), using the Set e-mail recipient (CR)  
command, before you can assign events to monitor with the Set e-mail events for recipient (EM) command.  
N
Set e-mail events for  
recipient  
EX4!X4#X4$X4$ X4$ }  
,
,
,
, ... ,  
EM  
X4$X4$X4$ X4$]  
Ipe  
,
,
, ... ,  
Response description:  
Notify what?, inputs 1 - 64 (inputs above the matrix size are always 0) fans power supply  
Response example (for CrossPoint 450 Plus 6464):  
Notify failed and fixed  
E-mail input 8 status  
Ignore input 16  
E-mail power supply and fan status  
Response: 3, 1  
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
Input: 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64  
Power Supplies  
Fans  
Read e-mail events for  
recipient  
EX4! }  
X4$X4$X4$ X4$]  
, ... ,  
EM  
,
,
Set DHCP on or off  
EX4^ }  
X4^]  
Idh  
DH  
Read DHCP status  
E }  
X4^]  
DH  
Set serial port parameters  
Read serial port parameters  
Set serial port mode  
EX4& X4*X4(X5)X5! } X4*X4(X5)X5!]  
*
,
,
,
CP  
,
,
,
EX4& }  
X4&• X4*X4(X5)X5!]  
Ccp  
CP  
Cpn  
Cpn  
,
,
,
EX4& X5@ }  
X4&• X5@]  
Cty  
*
CY  
X4&  
The front panel Configuration port (  
= 2) is limited to the RS-232 protocol only.  
N
Read serial port mode  
Set verbose mode  
EX4& }  
X5@]  
X5#]  
Vrb  
CY  
EX5# }  
CV  
Read verbose mode  
E }  
X5#]  
X5$]  
CV  
Read connection’s security  
level  
E
CK  
Commit RAM to flash  
memory  
E }  
X5%]  
1FF  
Nvr  
Check RAM  
E }  
X5%]  
FF  
Special Characters  
The HTML language reserves certain characters for specific functions. The switcher  
will not accept these characters as part of preset names, the switcher’s name,  
passwords, or locally created file names.  
The switcher rejects the following characters:  
{space (spaces are ok for names)} + } ~ , @ = ‘ [ ] { } < > ’ “ semicolon (;)  
colon (:) | \ and ?.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • SIS Programming and Control  
4-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers  
Chapter Five  
5
Matrix Software  
Matrix Switchers Control Program  
Special Characters  
Button-Label Generator  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Matrix Software  
Two software programs accompany the matrix switcher BMEs:  
•
•
The Extron Matrix Switcher Control Program, which communicates with the  
switcher BME 0 via the RS-232/RS-422 port and the Ethernet port, provides  
an easy way to set up ties and sets of ties.  
The Extron Button-Label Generator, which allows you to design and print  
labels for the buttons on the optional front panel.  
Both programs are compatible with Windows 95/98, Windows NT, Windows ME,  
Windows 2000, and Windows XP. Updates to these programs can be downloaded  
from the Extron Web site (http://www.extron.com).  
Matrix Switchers Control Program  
Installing the software  
The program is contained on a CD-ROM and is also available on the Extron Web  
site, www.extron.com. Load and run the program from the hard drive.  
To install the program from the CD-ROM to the hard drive, load the CD and it  
should install automatically. If it does not self install, run Launch.exe from the  
CD and follow the instructions that appear on the screen. The program occupies  
approximately 1 MB (megabyte) of hard-drive space.  
By default, the installation program creates the folder  
C:\Program Files\Extron\Matrix_Switcher directory and creates two icons: Matrix  
Switcher Control Program and Matrix Switcher Help.  
The program controls most Extron matrix switchers, but its operation is limited  
to the features and configuration of your switcher.  
N
The CrossPoint 450 Plus or MAV Plus switcher BME can support either the  
front panel Configuration port or the rear panel Remote RS-232/RS-422 port.  
N
Remote RS-232/RS-422 port — The port can be configured for either the  
RS-232 or RS-422 serial communication protocol and operate at the 9600,  
19200, 38400, or 115200 baud rate. See Selecting the rear panel Remote port  
protocol and baud rate in chapter 3, Operation, to configure the rear panel  
port from the front panel.  
Configuration port — The port supports RS-232 serial communication  
protocol only. The port can operate at the 9600, 19200, 38400, or 115200 baud  
rate, but Extron recommends leaving this port at the 9600 baud rate. See  
the Set serial parameters command on page 4-21 to configure the port using an  
SIS command.  
Software operation via Ethernet  
When a matrix switcher BME is connected to an Ethernet WAN or LAN, any  
number of users can operate it, locally or remotely, using the Matrix Switcher  
Control Program. See Ethernet connection in chapter 2, Installation, for installation  
details.  
Connection to the switcher BME via the Ethernet is password protected. There  
are two levels of password protection: administrator and user. Administrators  
have full access to all switching capabilities and editing functions. Users can select  
inputs and outputs, set and recall presets, and view all settings with the exception  
of passwords. If the same password or no password is required for logging on, all  
personnel log on with administrator privileges. Fields and functions that exceed  
user privileges are grayed out in the Matrix Switcher Control Program when the  
operator is logged on as a user.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Matrix Software  
5-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ethernet protocol settings  
The IP Settings/Options window (figure 5-5 on page 5-7) provides a location for  
viewing and, if connected via the RS-232 link or if logged on via the Ethernet  
port as an administrator, editing settings unique to the Ethernet interface. See  
IP Settings/Options window later in this chapter for more details.  
Using the software  
Many items found in the Matrix Switcher Control Program are also accessible  
via optional front panel controls (see chapter 3, Operation) and under SIS control  
(see chapter 4, SIS Programming and Control). The Matrix Switcher Help Program  
provides information on settings and on how to use the control program itself.  
1.  
To run the Matrix Switcher Control Program, double-click on the  
Matrix Switcher Control Program icon (shown at right) in the  
Extron Electronics group or folder.  
The Comm Port Selection window (figure 5-1) appears.  
Figure 5-1 — Comm port selection window  
2.  
Choose either the comm port that is connected to the matrix switcher BME 0’s  
RS-232/RS-422 port, IP [LAN], or Emulate.  
ꢀ
If you selected a comm port, check the baud rate displayed in the comm  
port selection window. If you need to change the baud rate, click on the  
Baud button and double-click on the desired baud rate.  
Available rates are 9600, 19200, 38400, and 115200. The default is 9600.  
Click OK and proceed to step 4.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
If you selected IP [LAN], click OK and proceed to step 3.  
If you selected Emulate, click OK and see Using emulation mode on  
page 5-20.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Matrix Software  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-3  
Matrix Software, cont’d  
3.  
If you selected IP [LAN] in step 2, the IP Connection window appears  
(figure 5-2).  
Figure 5-2 — Address and password entry  
a. Examine the Extron IP Address field in the IP Connection window. The  
field displays the last Extron IP address entered.  
If the IP address is correct: Proceed to step 3b.  
If the address is not correct: Either click in the Extron IP Address field  
and enter the IP address or click on the scroll down button ( ) and select  
from among the recently used addresses. Proceed to step 3b.  
If the local system administrators have not changed the value, the factory-  
specified default, 192.168.254.254, is the correct value for this field.  
N
b. If the switcher is password protected, click in the Password field and  
enter the enter the appropriate administrator or user password.  
c. Click Connect.  
If you logged on using the administrator password, the Windows  
program connects you to the matrix switcher BME 0 with all of the  
administrator rights and privileges.  
If you logged on using the user password, the Windows program  
connects you to the matrix switcher BME 0 with only user capabilities.  
If an incorrect password was entered, the program beeps and returns to  
the password entry display.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Matrix Software  
5-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.  
The Extron Matrix Switcher Control Program window (figure 5-3 and  
figure 5-4) appears. The window displays the current configuration of the  
attached matrix.  
Figure 5-3 — Matrix Switcher Control Program window (no ties or icons)  
•
To set up audio in follow mode (audio and video have the same tie  
configuration), select the Follow box at the bottom of the window. To  
set up audio in breakaway mode (audio and video have different tie  
configurations), deselect the Follow box.  
•
•
To make the control program easier to use, assign a device icon to each  
input and output. Click on a box that represents an input or output, and  
drag the desired icon onto the box from the icon palette that appears.  
To create a tie, drag an input box to one or more output boxes. To remove  
a tie, drag the output box to its tied input box or to the trash can.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Matrix Software  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-5  
Matrix Software, cont’d  
Figure 5-4 — Matrix Switcher Control Program window (ties and icons  
assigned)  
•
For quick display of information on a specific input or output device,  
position the cursor over that device in the control program window. The  
program opens a window that details the connections to that device, the  
audio level, and, for systems with CrossPoint 450 Plus switcher BMEs  
only, the switching interval (RGB delay) and the frequency of the video  
signal input from or output to that device. See the inset box in figure 5-4.  
•
If desired, on the task bar, click Tools > IP Options to set the switcher’s IP  
parameters in the IP Settings/Options window (figure 5-5).  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Matrix Software  
5-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IP Settings/Options window  
The IP Settings/Options window (figure 5-5), accessible via the Tools menu,  
provides a location for viewing and, if connected via the RS-232/RS-422 link or if  
logged on via the Ethernet port as an administrator, editing settings unique to the  
Ethernet interface. See appendix A, Ethernet Connection, for basic information about  
IP addresses. None of the fields on this screen can be edited while you are logged  
on as a user.  
Figure 5-5 — Control program IP setting/options window  
Editing variables on the IP Settings/Options screen while connected via the  
Ethernet port can immediately disconnect the user from the switcher. Extron  
recommends editing the settings on this screen using the RS-232 link and  
protecting the Ethernet access to this screen by assigning an administrator’s  
password to qualified and knowledgeable personnel only.  
N
When the control program is connected to the switcher via the RS-232 link, the  
Administrator and User Password fields are not masked. If a password has been  
inadvertently changed to an unknown value, you can look up and, if desired,  
change a password in this window without knowing the current password.  
N
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Matrix Software  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-7  
Matrix Software, cont’d  
Matrix IP Address field  
The Matrix IP Address field contains the IP address of the connected matrix  
switcher. This value is encoded in the flash memory in the switcher.  
Valid IP addresses consist of four 1-, 2-, or 3-digit numeric subfields separated by  
dots (periods). Each field can be numbered from 000 through 255. Leading zeroes,  
up to 3 digits total per field, are optional. Values of 256 and above are invalid.  
The default address is 192.168.254.254, but if this conflicts with other equipment at  
your installation, you can change the IP address to any valid value.  
The Matrix IP Address field is grayed out and uneditable when DHCP is  
selected.  
N
Editing the Extron IP address while connected via the Ethernet port can  
immediately disconnect the user from the matrix switcher. Extron recommends  
editing this field using the RS-232/RS-422 link and protecting the Ethernet  
access to this screen by assigning an administrator’s password to qualified and  
knowledgeable personnel only.  
N
Edit this field as follows:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Click in the Matrix IP address field. The graphic cursor becomes a text cursor.  
Edit the address as desired.  
Press the Tab key on the keyboard or click in another field to exit the  
Matrix IP Address field.  
4.  
Click on the Take button to make the address change take affect.  
Extron Name/Descriptor field  
The Extron Name/Descriptor field contains the name used as the “from”  
information when the matrix switcher e-mails notification of its failed or repaired  
status. This descriptor can be changed to any valid name, up to 24 alphanumeric  
characters.  
The following characters are invalid in the Extron Name/Descriptor field:  
{space} + ~ , @ = ‘ [ ] { } < > ’ “ ; : | \ and ?.  
N
Edit this field as follows:  
1.  
Click in the Extron name/descriptor field. The graphic cursor becomes a text  
cursor.  
2.  
3.  
Edit the name as desired.  
Press the Tab key on the keyboard or click in another field to exit the Extron  
Name/Descriptor field.  
4.  
Click on the Take button to make the name change take effect.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Matrix Software  
5-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Gateway IP address field  
The Gateway IP Address field identifies the address of the gateway to the mail  
server to be used if the matrix switcher BME 0 and the mail server are not on the  
same subnet.  
Valid IP addresses consist of four 1-, 2-, or 3-digit numeric subfields separated by  
dots (periods). Each field can be numbered from 000 through 255. Leading zeroes,  
up to 3 digits total per field, are optional. Values of 256 and above are invalid.  
Edit this field as follows:  
1.  
Click in the Gateway IP Address field. The graphic cursor becomes a text  
cursor.  
2.  
3.  
Edit the address as desired.  
Press the Tab key on the keyboard or click in another field to exit the  
Gateway IP Address field.  
4.  
Click the Take button to make the address change take affect.  
Subnet Mask field  
The Subnet Mask field is used to determine whether the matrix switcher BME 0  
is on the same subnet as the controlling PC or the mail server when you are  
subnetting. For more information, see Subnetting — A Primer, in Appendix A,  
Ethernet Connection.  
Edit this field as follows:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Click in the Subnet Mask field. The graphic cursor becomes a text cursor.  
Edit the mask as desired.  
Press the Tab key on the keyboard or click in another field to exit the Subnet  
Mask field.  
4.  
Click the Take button to make the mask take affect.  
Hardware Address field  
The hardware address is hardcoded in the matrix switcher BME 0 and cannot be  
changed.  
Use DHCP checkbox  
The Use DHCP checkbox directs the matrix switcher BME 0 to ignore any entered  
IP addresses and to obtain its IP address from a Dynamic Host Configuration  
Protocol (DHCP) server (if the network is DHCP capable). Contact the local system  
administrator.  
Date field  
The Date field displays the current date in the Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) zone.  
If necessary, adjust the date as follows:  
1.  
Click in the Date field. A set date field appears with  
the date in the format (M)M/(D)D/YYYY. Leading  
zeroes are not used. The graphic cursor becomes a text  
cursor in the set date field.  
2.  
3.  
Edit the field as desired to set the proper date. Leading zeroes are optional.  
Press the Tab key on the keyboard or click in another field to exit the set date  
field.  
4.  
Click the Take button to make the date change take affect.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Matrix Software  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-9  
Matrix Software, cont’d  
Time (local) field  
The Time (local) field displays the current time in the local time zone. If necessary,  
click on the Sync Time to PC button to set the switcher to your computer’s internal  
time or else adjust the time manually as follows:  
1.  
Click in the time field. A set time field appears  
with the date in the format HH:MM:SS  
(00:00:00 to 23:59:59). The graphic cursor becomes a  
text cursor in the set time field.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
Edit the field as desired to set the proper time. Remember to use 24-hour  
time. Leading zeroes are optional.  
Press the Tab key on the keyboard or click in another field to exit the set time  
field.  
Click the Take button to make the time change take affect.  
Sync Time to PC button  
Clicking the mouse on the Sync Time to PC button causes the computer you are  
operating to send its internal time to the switcher in a set time command.  
GMT (offset) field  
The GMT field displays the amount of time, in hours and minutes, that the local  
time varies from the GMT international time reference. If necessary, adjust the  
offset as follows:  
1.  
Click in the GMT field. A set offset field appears with the offset  
in the format HH:MM (–12:00 to +14:00). The graphic cursor  
becomes a text cursor in the set offset field.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
Edit the field as desired to set the proper offset. Leading zeroes are optional.  
Some time zones are on the half-hour (30 minutes).  
Press the Tab key on the keyboard or click in another field to exit the Set Offset  
field.  
Click the Take button to make the offset change take affect.  
Use Daylight Savings checkbox  
Click in the Use Daylight Savings checkbox. When Daylight Savings Time is turned  
on, the switcher automatically updates its internal clock between Standard Time  
and Daylight Savings Time in the spring and fall on the date that the time change  
occurs in the country or region selected. When Daylight Savings Time is turned off,  
the switcher does not adjust its time reference.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Matrix Software  
5-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Administrator Password field  
The Administrator Password field displays the password required to log on to the  
matrix switcher BME 0 via the Ethernet port with all of the administrator’s rights  
and privileges. Passwords are case sensitive and are limited to 12 upper-case and  
lower-case alphanumeric characters.  
While you are logged on as a user, this field is masked with asterisks (************) as  
a security measure.  
Editing the Administrator Password field while connected via the Ethernet port  
can immediately disconnect the user from the switcher. Extron recommends  
editing this field using the RS-232/RS-422 link and protecting the Ethernet  
access to this screen by assigning an administrator’s password to qualified and  
knowledgeable personnel only.  
N
The following characters are invalid in passwords:  
N
{space} + ~ , @ = ‘ [ ] { } < > ’ “ ; : | \ and ?.  
Edit this field as follows:  
1.  
Click in the Administrator Password field. The graphic cursor becomes a text  
cursor.  
2.  
3.  
Edit the case-sensitive password as desired.  
Press the Tab key on the keyboard or click in another field to exit the  
Administrator Password field.  
4.  
Click the Take button to make the password change take affect.  
User Password field  
The User Password field displays the password required to log on to the  
matrix switcher BME 0 via the Ethernet port as a user, without all of the  
administrator’s rights and privileges. Passwords are case sensitive and are limited  
to 12 upper-case and lower-case alphanumeric characters.  
While you are logged on as a user, this field is masked with asterisks (************) as  
a security measure.  
An administrator password must be created before a user password can be  
created.  
N
The following characters are invalid in passwords:  
N
{space} + ~ , @ = ‘ [ ] { } < > ’ “ ; : | \ and ?.  
Edit this field as follows:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Click in the User Password field. The graphic cursor becomes a text cursor.  
Edit the case-sensitive password as desired.  
Press the Tab key on the keyboard or click in another field to exit the User  
Password field.  
4.  
Click the Take button to make the password change take affect.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Matrix Software  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-11  
Matrix Software, cont’d  
Mail Server IP Address field  
The Mail Server IP Address field displays the IP address of the mail server that  
handles the e-mail for the facility in which the matrix switcher is installed.  
Valid IP addresses consist of four 1-, 2-, or 3-digit numeric subfields separated by  
dots (periods). Each field can be numbered from 000 through 255. Leading zeroes,  
up to 3 digits total per field, are optional. Values of 256 and above are invalid.  
Edit this field as follows:  
1.  
Click in the mail server IP address field. The graphic cursor becomes a text  
cursor.  
2.  
3.  
Edit the IP address as desired.  
Press the Tab key on the keyboard or click in another field to exit the mail  
server IP address field.  
4.  
Click the Take button to make the address change take affect.  
Mail Server Domain Name field  
The Mail Server Domain Name field displays the domain name that the  
matrix switcher BME 0 uses to log on to the e-mail server. Standard domain  
conventions (such as nnnnn@xxx.com) apply.  
The following characters are invalid in a domain name:  
N
{space} + ~ , = ‘ [ ] { } < > ’ “ ; : | \ and ?. The @ character is only  
acceptable as the lead-in to the domain name (such as @folklore.net).  
Edit this field as follows:  
1.  
Click in the Mail Server Domain Name field. The graphic cursor becomes a  
text cursor.  
2.  
3.  
Edit the name as desired.  
Press the Tab key on the keyboard or click in another field to exit the  
Mail Server Domain Name field.  
4.  
Click the Take button to make the name change take affect.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Matrix Software  
5-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E-mail Addressee fields  
The eight E-mail Addressee fields permit the administrator to identify the e-mail  
addresses of the personnel to whom the matrix switcher BME e-mails notification of  
its failure and repair status. Figure 5-6 shows a typical e-mail from the switcher.  
Miles Standish  
From:  
Sent:  
To:  
[email protected]  
Friday, March 03, 2006 11:22 AM  
Miles Standish  
Subject:  
CP-450-MAV-Plus-FF-FF-09 - Fan #1 is now running in BME 5  
Fri, 03 Mar 2006 11:21:48  
Unit Name = CP-450-MAV-Plus-FF-FF-09  
Unit IP Address = 192-168-254-254  
Figure 5-6— Typical CrossPoint 450 Plus e-mail  
The radio buttons and check boxes associated with each address field permit the  
administrator to specify specific e-mail requirements for each recipient.  
Edit these fields and controls as follows:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
Click in the desired E-mail Addressee field. The graphic cursor becomes a text  
cursor.  
Edit the e-mail address as desired. Standard e-mail address conventions  
(for example: nnnnn@xxx.com) apply.  
Press the Tab key on the keyboard or click in another field to exit the e-mail  
addressee field.  
In the square check boxes associated with each addressee, select the options  
about which the addressee is to be e-mailed: missing input(s), fans, and/or  
power supply. In the floating box that contains the input numbers, select the  
inputs that need monitoring.  
5.  
In the round radio buttons associated with each addressee, select whether the  
addressee is to be e-mailed of failures, fixes, both, or not be notified.  
The None radio button is useful for temporarily removing personnel from the  
e-mail list when they are unavailable, such as on travel or vacation.  
6.  
7.  
If desired, click on the Send test E-mail button to test the e-mail function.  
Click on the Take button to make the e-mail address changes take affect.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Matrix Software  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-13  
Matrix Software, cont’d  
Update firmware  
The firmware upgrade utility, accessible via the Tools menu, provides a way to  
replace the firmware that is coded on the switcher BME 0’s control board without  
taking the switcher out of service, opening the switcher enclosure, and replacing  
the firmware chip.  
Update the switcher firmware as follows:  
The update firmware utility is for replacing the firmware that controls all  
switcher operation. This is not the window to insert your own HTML pages.  
See Upload HTML files to insert custom HTML pages.  
N
To prevent operational problems, when a firmware update is planned, update the  
firmware in all BMEs.  
N
1.  
Visit the Extron web site, www.extron.com, select the CrossPoint/MAV Plus  
product category, and select the latest firmware install package (*.exe file) for  
download. Note the folder to which you save the firmware file.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
Run the executable (*.exe) file to decompress the firmware file.  
Start the Matrix Switcher Control Program  
Connect to the matrix switcher BME to be updated. See Using the software in  
this chapter, steps 1 through 4, starting on page 5-3.  
The Ethernet connection is much faster than the RS-232/RS-422 connection.  
Extron recommends using the Ethernet connection rather than the serial port for  
firmware uploads.  
N
If the computer that you are using to update the firmware is connected to the  
BME via an Ethernet network, each BME must have a unique IP address.  
N
5.  
Click Tools > Update firmware. The open file window appears (figure 5-7).  
Figure 5-7 — Open window  
6.  
Navigate to the folder where you saved the firmware upgrade file. Select the  
file.  
Valid firmware files must have the file extension .S19. Any other file extension  
is not a firmware upgrade.  
N
N
The original factory-installed firmware is permanently available on each matrix  
switcher BME. If the attempted firmware upload fails for any reason, the  
switcher reverts to the factory-installed firmware.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Matrix Software  
5-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.  
8.  
Click on the Open button. A status window appears that shows the progress  
of the upload. The firmware upload may take a few minutes.  
Shift the Ethernet cable (recommended) or serial cable to the next BME and  
repeat steps 4 through 7 for each BME.  
Upload HTML files  
You can create customized HTML pages for the switcher to display. The HTML  
Files List window (figure 5-8), accessible via the Tools menu, provides a way to  
view the contents of the switcher’s file system and upload custom HTML pages to  
the switcher.  
Figure 5-8 — HTML Files List window  
Upload HTML pages as follows:  
The files listed in figure 5-8 are shown for example only and may not be present  
on your switcher.  
N
The HTML Files List window is for inserting your own HTML pages. This is  
not the window to replace the firmware that controls all switcher operation. See  
Update firmware in this chapter to replace the firmware.  
N
The following characters are invalid in file names:  
N
{space} + ~ , @ = ‘ [ ] { } < > ’ “ ; : | \ and ?.  
1.  
2.  
Connect the PC to the matrix switcher BME 0 via the switcher’s RS-232/  
RS-422 port or Ethernet port.  
Start the Matrix Switcher Control Program and connect to the  
CrossPoint 450 Plus or MAV Plus switcher. See Using the software in this  
chapter, steps 1 through 4, starting on page 5-3.  
3.  
Click on Tools > HTML File Manager.  
4.  
Click on the Pick File(s) to Load to Server button. An open file window appears.  
Navigate to the folder where you saved the HTML file(s). Select the file(s).  
5.  
To select multiple files, hold the Ctrl key while you select the desired files.  
N
N
If you want one of the HTML files that you created to be the default start-up  
page, name the file “index.html”. The CrossPoint 450 Plus or MAV Plus  
switcher automatically looks for that file name when you first connect to it using  
an Internet browser.  
6.  
Click on the Open button. The file(s) upload to the CrossPoint 450 Plus or  
MAV Plus switcher may take a few minutes.  
7.  
8.  
Click on the Update button to confirm the upload.  
Click on the Close button to exit the HTML Files List window.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Matrix Software  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-15  
Matrix Software, cont’d  
Windows buttons, drop boxes, and trash  
The buttons, drop boxes, and trash can on the right side of the program window  
perform the following functions:  
Power — Unavailable for CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus  
switchers, because the switcher power cannot be controlled via  
software.  
Executive mode — Allows you to lock out front panel operations,  
except for the view-only mode functions.  
Room menu — Displays a list of up to 10 rooms. You can select a  
room from the list to display it in the window.  
A Room is a subset of outputs that are logically related to each  
other, as determined by the operator. The CrossPoint 450 Plus or  
MAV Plus switcher supports up to 10 rooms, each of which can  
consist of from 1 to 16 outputs.  
N
Presets menu — Displays a list of up to 64 global presets and up to  
100 room presets (10 rooms x 10 presets per room). You can select  
a preset from the list to display it in the window and either activate  
it (Go) or delete it (Delete).  
Go — Activates the selected preset as the current configuration.  
Save as — Allows the current set of ties to be saved as a preset. Enter  
the preset number when prompted to do so.  
Changes – Take — Allows you to save to file any changes made to  
the displayed configuration.  
Changes – Cancel — Returns to the previous screen, undoing any  
changes you have made.  
Trash can — Drag and drop from an input or output button to the  
trash can to unmake all ties associated with that input or output.  
Windows menus  
File menu  
Save matrix settings as — Saves a complete set of up to  
164 presets (64 global presets + 100 room presets), plus  
the last active setting (preset #0), to a file. Saved settings  
include audio gain settings (if specified), assigned icons,  
and icon captions to a specified file.  
Restore matrix settings from — Loads and activates a  
previously saved setting file.  
Save this-session’s settings — Same as Save matrix settings as, but without  
specifying a file name.  
Restore last-session’s settings — Loads the icons and icon captions that were saved  
during the last session. If you saved the previous session’s changes to disk the  
last time you exited the program, the ties from that session are also loaded.  
Select printer — Selects the target printer.  
Print tie map — Prints the tie set that is displayed on the screen.  
Exit — Closes the Matrix Switcher Control Program.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Matrix Software  
5-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tools menu  
Assign device icons — Displays the complete set of input  
and output device icons. You can drag any of these  
icons to the input and output boxes.  
Edit device palette — Allows you to add your own device  
icon graphics.  
RGB delay settings — Displays the switching interval  
setting for each input and allows you to change them.  
Audio-Input gain settings — Displays the audio gain  
level setting for a single input or for all inputs and  
allows you to change it. The level is expressed as the  
magnitude (number of decibels) and polarity (positive,  
gain or negative, attenuation) of the audio adjustment.  
Audio-Output volume settings — Displays the audio  
output level setting for a single input or for all inputs and allows you to  
change it. The level is expressed as a percentage of the input audio volume  
that is applied to the output; 0% is full attenuation (audio is silent), 100% is  
full volume.  
Mute-Output settings — Displays the RGB Delay, Volume, and Mute Adjust  
screen, which allows you to mute and unmute individual or all video and  
audio outputs.  
View input frequencies — (DSVP) Displays the input horizontal and vertical  
frequencies for each input.  
Update firmware — Allows you to replace the firmware that is coded on the  
switcher’s control board without taking the switcher out of service, opening  
the switcher enclosure, and replacing the firmware chip set. See Update  
firmware on page 5-14.  
IP options —Allows you to set IP options. See IP Settings/Options window on page 5-7.  
HTML file manager — Displays a list of HTML files installed on the switcher and  
allows you to upload custom files from a connected PC to the switcher. See  
Upload HTML files on page 5-15.  
Hardware status — Provides an overall view of the status of the matrix switcher,  
including the primary and secondary power supply status and the individual  
voltages, the fan and temperature status, the Remote RS-232/RS-422 port  
configuration, and the installed and updated firmware status (figure 5-9).  
Figure 5-9 — Status window  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Matrix Software  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-17  
Matrix Software, cont’d  
Green — Proper operation.  
Red — Component has failed.  
White — Components are not installed.  
The CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus switcher BMEs are not available in  
custom configurations. Each model has all available monitored components,  
such as power supplies and fans, installed.  
N
Only the MAV Plus audio BMEs require fans, so the white “not installed  
indication is normal for fans for all sync and video BMEs.  
If you see the white “not installed” indication for audio BMEs, the “not  
installed” component probably became disconnected during shipment or rough  
handling.  
Name presets — Allows you to assign a name to each of the 64 global presets and  
100 room presets.  
Preset names are limited to 12 upper- and lower-case alphanumeric characters,  
space, and the _ : = and / characters.  
N
N
The following characters are invalid in preset names:  
+ ~ , @ = ‘ [ ] { } < > ’ “ ; : | \ and ?.  
Show RS-232 strings — Displays the ASCII commands that are used by the current  
configuration. You can refer to these for RS-232 programming.  
I/O group settings — Allows you to establish and clear I/O groups.  
Room configuration — Allows you to assign outputs to rooms or delete outputs  
from rooms.  
A Room is a subset of outputs that are logically related to each other, as  
determined by the operator. The CrossPoint 450 Plus or MAV Plus switcher  
supports up to 10 rooms, each of which can consist of from 1 to 16 outputs.  
N
Initialize — Initializes and clears any or all of the following: current ties, presets,  
groups, RGB delay, audio configuration, preset names, input and output  
names, and icons.  
Preferences menu  
Immediate changes — Causes configuration changes to take  
effect immediately.  
Hold/verify changes — Delays implementation of  
configuration changes until the Changes – Take button  
is pressed.  
Ties as lines — Displays ties as lines (figure 5-10).  
Figure 5-10 — Ties shown as lines  
Ties as crosspoints — Displays ties as a matrix of inputs and outputs (figure 5-11).  
Ties that have been made are indicated as amber (video and audio), green  
(video only), and red (audio only) boxes. Ties that will take effect when you  
click on the Take button are indicated by +. Ties that will be broken when you  
click on the Take button are indicated by –.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Matrix Software  
5-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 5-11 — Ties shown as crosspoints  
Frequency read options (systems with a CrossPoint 450 Plus sync BME only) —  
Allows you to set the input signal detection (DSVP) feature as follows:  
•
•
•
To never sample and display the sync or no sync status  
(set this option to None)  
To automatically refresh the display  
(set this option to Automatically every 10 seconds)  
To sample the sync and update the display whenever you make a  
configuration change (set this option to On demand or by refresh).  
Limit ties to same group — Allows you to limit the creation of ties using the  
program to inputs and outputs that are in the same group (similar to front  
panel operation).  
Icons in I/O boxes — Erases any numbers in the I/O boxes in the Control  
Program window (figure 5-4). You can place icons in the boxes.  
Numbers in I/O boxes — Erases any icons in the I/O boxes in the  
Control Program window and fills each box with the associated  
input or output number.  
Catch FPC/others changes — When checked, sets the switcher to report all  
configuration and setting changes to the Remote RS-232/RS-422 or Ethernet  
connection that turned this selection on. These reports allow the Matrix  
Switcher Control Program to track the changes that occur in the switcher’s  
configuration and settings, whether commanded via the front panel, the  
RS-232/RS-422 port, or the Ethernet port.  
Master-Reset selection  
Master reset clears all ties and presets, all video and audio mutes, resets all I/O  
grouping, sets all input audio levels to unity gain (+0 dB), and sets all output  
volume levels to 100% (0 dB of attenuation).  
Master reset does not reset the Internet protocol (IP) settings.  
N
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Matrix Software  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-19  
Matrix Software, cont’d  
Using emulation mode  
Emulation mode allows you to set up the software without attaching the switcher  
to the computer. To use emulation mode, do the following:  
1.  
Double-click the Matrix Switcher Control Program icon in the Extron  
Electronics group or folder.  
2.  
3.  
Choose Emulate, and click OK.  
Choose an emulation file to open, and click on OK. The file DEMO.MTX  
provides a sample of a completed matrix setup. Selecting the file NEW.INI or  
clicking Cancel provides a blank setup to get you started.  
4.  
5.  
6.  
Enter the file name under which you want to save any changes to the file, and  
click OK.  
Select the number of video boards, audio boards, and matrix model for which  
you are preparing a configuration, and click OK.  
Continue using the program as described on page 5-5.  
Using the help system  
For information about program features, you can access the help program in any of  
the following ways:  
•
•
•
From the Extron Electronics program folder or group, double-  
click on the Matrix Switcher Help icon (shown at right).  
From within the Matrix Switcher Control Program, click on the  
Help menu on the main screen.  
From within the Matrix Switcher Control Program, press the F1 key.  
Special Characters  
The HTML language reserves certain characters for specific functions. The switcher  
will not accept these characters as part of preset names, the switcher’s name,  
passwords, or locally created file names.  
The switcher rejects the following characters:  
{space (spaces are ok for names)} + ~ , @ = ‘ [ ] { } < > ’ “ semicolon (;) colon  
(:) | \ and ?.  
Button-Label Generator  
The Button Label Generator software creates labels that you can place in the  
translucent covers of the input and output pushbuttons. You can create labels with  
names, alphanumeric characters, or even color bitmaps for easy and intuitive input  
and output selection. See appendix B, Reference Information, for blank labels and  
procedures for removing and replacing the button labels.  
The program is contained on the same CD-ROM as the Matrix Switcher+ Control  
Program and is also available on the Extron Web site, www.extron.com.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Matrix Software  
5-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers  
Chapter 6  
6
HTML Operation  
Download the Startup Page  
System Status Page  
System Configuration Page  
File Management Page  
Set and View Ties Page  
Special Characters  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HTML Operation  
The switcher can be controlled and operated through BME 0’s Ethernet port,  
connected via a LAN or WAN, using a web browser such as Microsoft’s Internet  
Explorer. The browser’s display of the switcher’s status or operation has the  
appearance of web pages. This chapter describes the factory-installed HTML  
pages, which are always available and cannot be erased or overwritten.  
If your Ethernet connection to the matrix switcher is unstable, try turning off  
the proxy server in your Web browser. In Microsoft’s Internet Explore, click  
Tools > Internet Options > Connections > LAN Settings, uncheck the “Use a  
proxy server...” box, and then click OK.  
N
Download the Startup Page  
Access the switcher using HTML pages as follows:  
1. Start the Web browser program.  
2. Click in the browser’s Address field.  
Enter BME 0’s Matrix IP address in the browser’s Address field.  
3.  
If the local system administrators have not changed the value, the factory-  
specified default, 192.168.254.254, is the correct value for this field.  
N
4.  
If you want the browser to display a page other than the default page (such as  
a custom page that you have uploaded), enter a slash (/) and the file name to  
open.  
The browser’s Address field should display the address in the following format:  
N
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/{optional_file_name.html}  
The following characters are invalid in file names:  
N
{space} + ~ , @ = ‘ [ ] { } < > ’ “ ; : | \ and ?.  
5.  
Press the keyboard Enter key. The switcher BME checks to see if it is  
password protected.  
If the switcher is not password protected, proceed to step 7.  
If the switcher is password protected, the switcher downloads the Enter  
Network Password page (figure 6-1).  
Figure 6-1 — Enter Network Password page  
A User Name entry is not required.  
N
6.  
Click in the Password field and type in the appropriate administrator or user  
password. Click the OK button.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • HTML Operation  
6-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.  
The switcher checks several possibilities, in the following order, and then  
responds accordingly:  
a. Does the address include a specific file name, such as  
10.13.156.10/file_name.html? If so, the switcher BME downloads that  
HTML page.  
b. Is there a file in the switcher BME’s memory that is named “index.html”?  
If so, the switcher downloads “index.html” as the default startup page.  
c. If neither of the above conditions is true, the switcher BME downloads  
the factory-installed default startup page, “nortxe_index.html”  
(figure 6-2), also known as the System Status page.  
System Status Page  
The System Status page (figure 6-2) provides a status report for all BMEs in the  
matrix switcher system, including the primary and secondary power supply  
status, the individual voltages, the fan status (if applicable), and the operating  
temperature. The System Status page is the default page that the switcher  
downloads when you connect to the switcher. Access the System Status page from  
other pages by clicking the Status tab.  
Refresh  
Select DSVP  
Figure 6-2 — System Status page  
The status web page automatically updates itself every thirty seconds to reflect the  
latest status of the switcher components.  
If a component fails or becomes disconnected, the display shows the change in  
status the next time it updates.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • HTML Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-3  
HTML Operation, cont’d  
DSVP page (systems with a sync BME only)  
You can view a snapshot-in-time of the input frequencies of connected inputs on  
the Digital Sync Validation Processing (DSVP) page (figure 6-3). Click the DSVP  
link to the left of the Status page to download the DSVP page.  
Select  
System Status  
Refresh  
Figure 6-3 — DSVP page  
The DSVP page automatically updates itself every 30 seconds to show the latest  
input frequencies changes or if an input has been disconnected.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • HTML Operation  
6-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Configuration Page  
The matrix switcher BME 0 downloads the System Configuration page (figure 6-4)  
when you click the Configuration tab. The screen consists of fields in which you  
can view and edit IP administration and system settings. The Email Settings and  
Passwords pages can be accessed by clicking the appropriate link. See appendix A,  
Ethernet Connection, for basic information about IP addresses and subnetting.  
Refresh  
Select Passwords  
Select Email Settings  
Select Firmware Upgrade  
Figure 6-4 — System Configuration page  
On password-protected connections, there are two levels of protection:  
administrator and user. Administrators have full access to all switching capabilities  
and editing functions. Users can create ties, save and recall presets, and set RGB/  
video and audio mutes.  
•
Ethernet connection to the switcher, either entering SIS commands (see  
chapter 4, SIS Programming and Control) or using the Extron Matrix Switcher+  
Control Program (see chapter 5, Matrix Software) is password protected.  
•
Connection via the RS-232/RS-422 port is not password protected.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • HTML Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-5  
HTML Operation, cont’d  
IP Settings fields  
The IP Settings fields provide a location for viewing and editing settings unique  
to the Ethernet interface. After editing any of the settings on this page, click the  
Submit button at the bottom of the page.  
Unit Name field  
The Unit Name field contains the name used as the “from” information when the  
switcher BME 0 e-mails notification of its failed or repaired status. This name field  
can be changed to any valid name, up to 24 alphanumeric characters.  
The following characters are invalid in the matrix name:  
+ ~ , @ = ‘ [ ] { } < > ’ “ ; : | \ and ?.  
N
DHCP radio buttons  
The DHCP On radio button directs the switcher BME 0 to ignore any entered IP  
addresses and to obtain its IP address from a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol  
(DHCP) server (if the network is DHCP capable). The DHCP Off radio button  
turns DHCP off. Contact the local system administrator for guidance on the use of  
DHCP.  
IP Address field  
The IP Address field contains the IP address of the connected switcher BME. This  
value is encoded in the switcher BME’s flash memory.  
Valid IP addresses consist of four 1-, 2-, or 3-digit numeric subfields separated by  
dots (periods). Each field can be numbered from 000 through 255. Leading zeroes,  
up to 3 digits total per field, are optional. Values of 256 and above are invalid.  
The factory-installed default address is 192.168.254.254, but if this conflicts with  
other equipment at your installation, you can change the IP address to any valid  
value.  
IP address changes can cause conflicts with other equipment. Only local system  
administrators should change IP addresses.  
N
Gateway IP Address field  
The Gateway IP Address field identifies the address of the gateway to the mail  
server to be used if the switcher BME 0 and the mail server are not on the same  
subnet.  
The gateway IP address has the same validity rules as the system IP address.  
Subnet Mask field  
The Subnet Mask field is used to determine whether the switcher BME 0 is on the  
same subnet as the mail server when you are subnetting. For more information, see  
Subnetting — A Primer, in Appendix A, Ethernet Connection.  
MAC Address field  
The Media Access Control (MAC) Address is hardcoded in the switcher BME and  
cannot be changed.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • HTML Operation  
6-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Date/Time Settings fields  
The Date/Time Settings fields (figure 6-5) provide a location for viewing the time  
functions and two methods for setting the time.  
Figure 6-5 — Date/Time Settings fields  
To sync the BME’s clock to the connected PC, simply click the Local Date/Time  
button and then click the Submit button.  
Use of the Local Date/Time button has no effect on the Zone and Daylight  
N
Savings Time functions.  
For more complete control of the date and time settings, change the settings as  
follows:  
1.  
Click the desired variable’s drop box. The adjustable variables are month,  
day, year, hours, minutes, AM/PM, and (time) zone. A drop down scroll box  
appears (the year drop box is selected in figure 6-5).  
2.  
Click and drag the slider or click the scroll up button or scroll down  
button until the desired variable is visible.  
3.  
Click the desired variable.  
If setting the time, set the local time. The Zone variable allows you to then enter  
the offset from Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).  
N
The Zone field identifies the standard time zone selected and displays the  
amount of time, in hours and minutes, that the local time varies from the GMT  
international time reference.  
N
4.  
5.  
Repeat steps 1 through 3 for other variables that need to be changed.  
If appropriate, click the Daylight Savings radio button to turn on the daylight  
savings time feature.  
When daylight savings time is turned on, the switcher automatically updates  
its internal clock between Standard Time and Daylight Savings Time in the  
spring and fall, on the date that the time change occurs in the selected country or  
region. When Daylight Savings Time is turned off, the switcher does not adjust  
its time reference.  
N
6.  
Click the Submit button.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • HTML Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-7  
HTML Operation, cont’d  
Passwords page  
Access the Passwords page (figure 6-6) by clicking the Passwords link on the  
System Settings page.  
Select System Settings  
Select Email Settings  
Select Firmware Upgrade  
Figure 6-6 — Passwords page  
The fields on the Passwords page are for entering and verifying administrator and  
user passwords. Passwords are case sensitive and are limited to 12 upper case and  
lower case alphanumeric characters. Each password must be entered twice; once  
in the Password field and then again in the Re-enter Password field. Characters in  
these fields are masked by asterisks (*****). If you do not want to password protect  
an access level, leave the Password field and the Re-Enter password field blank.  
After entering the desired password in both fields, click the Submit button.  
An administrator password must be created before a user password can be  
created.  
N
To clear an existing password so that no password is required, enter a space in the  
Password and Re-enter Password fields and click the Submit button.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • HTML Operation  
6-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Email Settings page  
Reach the Email Settings page (figure 6-7) by clicking the Email Settings link on  
the System Configuration page. The Email Settings page has fields for setting up  
the switcher BME 0’s e-mail notification capabilities. For the e-mail settings and  
for each row of the e-mail notification settings, click the Edit button to make the  
fields available for editing. The button changes to Save. After editing the settings  
associated with the Edit/Save button, click the Save button.  
Select System Configuration  
Select Passwords  
Refresh  
Select Firmware Upgrade  
Figure 6-7 — Email Settings page  
Mail IP Address field  
The Mail IP Address field displays the IP address and the domain name of the mail  
server that handles the e-mail for the facility in which the matrix switcher BME 0 is  
installed.  
Valid IP addresses consist of four 1-, 2-, or 3-digit numeric subfields separated by  
dots (periods). Each field can be numbered from 000 through 255. Leading zeroes,  
up to 3 digits total per field, are optional. Values of 256 and above are invalid.  
Domain Name field  
The Domain Name field displays the domain name that the matrix switcher  
BME 0 uses to log on to the e-mail server. Standard domain name conventions (for  
example: nnnnn@xxx.com) apply.  
The following characters are invalid in a domain name:  
N
{space} + ~ , = ‘ [ ] { } < > ’ “ ; : | \ and ?. The @ character is only  
acceptable as the lead-in to the domain name (such as @folklore.net).  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • HTML Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-9  
HTML Operation, cont’d  
Email address fields  
The eight Email address fields identify the e-mail addresses of the personnel to  
whom the matrix switcher BME 0 e-mails notification of its failure and repair status.  
Standard e-mail address conventions (nnnnn@xxx.com) apply.  
The check boxes and drop boxes associated with each address field permit the  
operator to assign specific criteria under which the BME will e-mail recipients. In  
the associated Missing Input drop boxes, select the inputs to monitor for presence  
or absence of a signal. Check the Fans and Power boxes to monitor the cooling  
and power supplies. In the associated E-Mail Options drop box, select whether  
the recipient is to be e-mailed of failures, fixes, both, not notified, or to be removed  
from the e-mail list. The Suspend option is useful for temporarily removing  
personnel from the e-mail list when they are unavailable, such as on travel or  
vacation. Deleting an e-mail addressee and clicking the submit button removes the  
recipient from e-mail notification completely.  
Firmware Upgrade page  
The Firmware Upgrade page provides a way to replace the firmware that is coded  
on the switcher BME 0’s control board without taking the switcher out of service,  
opening the switcher enclosure, and replacing the firmware chip. Access the  
Firmware Upgrade page (figure 6-8) by clicking the Firmware Upgrade link on the  
System Configuration page.  
Select System Configuration  
Select Passwords  
Select Email Settings  
Refresh  
Figure 6-8 — Firmware Upgrade page  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • HTML Operation  
6-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Update the switcher BME 0 firmware as follows:  
The Firmware Upgrade page is only for replacing the firmware that controls all  
switcher operation. To insert your own HTML pages, see File Management  
Page, on page 6-12.  
N
To prevent operational problems, when a firmware update is planned, update the  
firmware in all BMEs.  
N
1.  
Visit the Extron web site, www.extron.com, select the CrossPoint/MAV Plus  
product category, and select the latest firmware installation package (*.exe file)  
for the switcher and download it. Note the folder to which you save the  
firmware file.  
2.  
Run the executable (*.exe) file to decompress the firmware file.  
3.  
Connect the PC to the matrix switcher BME 0 via the switcher’s Ethernet port.  
If the computer that you are using to update the firmware is connected to the  
BME via an Ethernet network, each BME must have a unique IP address.  
N
4.  
5.  
6.  
7.  
8.  
Access the matrix switcher BME using HTML pages.  
Click the Configuration tab.  
Click the Firmware Upgrade link.  
Click the Browse button. An open file window appears.  
Navigate to the folder where you saved the firmware upgrade file. Select the  
file.  
Valid firmware files must have the file extension ‘.S19’. Any other file extension  
is not a firmware upgrade.  
N
N
The original factory-installed firmware is permanently available on the matrix  
switcher BME. If the attempted firmware upload fails for any reason, the BME  
automatically reverts to the factory-installed firmware.  
9.  
Click the Open button.  
10. Click the Upload button. The firmware upload to the switcher BME may take  
a few minutes.  
11. Shift the Ethernet cable to the next BME and repeat steps 4 through 10 for each  
BME.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • HTML Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-11  
HTML Operation, cont’d  
File Management Page  
To delete files such as HTML pages from the connected switcher BME or to upload  
your own files to the switcher, click the File Management tab. The switcher BME  
downloads the file management HTML page (figure 6-9).  
Figure 6-9 — File Management page  
The files listed in figure 6-9 are shown for example only and may not be present  
on your switcher.  
N
To delete a file, check the associated delete check box and click the Delete Files  
button.  
Upload your own files as follows:  
The following characters are invalid in file names:  
N
{space} + ~ , @ = ‘ [ ] { } < > ’ “ ; : | \ and ?.  
1. Click the Browse button.  
2. Browse through your system and select the desired file(s).  
If you want one of the pages that you create and upload to be the default startup  
page, name that file “index.html”.  
N
3.  
Click the Upload File button. The file(s) that you selected appear in the list.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • HTML Operation  
6-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Set and View Ties Page  
You can create ties on the Set and View Ties page (figure 6-10). Access the Set and  
View Ties page by clicking the Control tab.  
Select Ties 1 through 32  
Select Ties 33 through 64  
Select RGB & Audio Settings  
Select Global Presets  
Figure 6-10 — Set and View Ties page  
The page consists of a matrix of input (rows) and output (columns) selection  
buttons of four different colors:  
• The amber buttons indicate video and audio ties.  
• The green buttons indicate video only ties.  
• The red buttons indicate audio only ties.  
• The gray buttons indicate no ties.  
If you lose track of the input and output associated with a specific button, let the  
mouse pointer rest over a button for a moment. As shown on figure 6-10, a field  
pops up that identifies the input and output for that button.  
N
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • HTML Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-13  
HTML Operation, cont’d  
Create a tie  
Select and switch an input as follows:  
1.  
Click the Video Only, Audio Only, or Video & Audio button to select video,  
audio, or both for switching (audio follow or audio breakaway). Each mouse  
click on a button toggles the other two buttons off.  
2.  
Move the mouse over the matrix of input and output selection buttons. Click  
a button to create a preliminary tie (if not tied) or preliminary untie (if tied)  
of the input and output associated with that button. A “P” (for preliminary)  
appears in the button.  
If you lose track of the input and output associated with a specific button, let the  
mouse rest over one of the tie buttons for a moment. A field pops up (as shown  
on figure 6-10) that identifies the input and output for that button.  
N
To tie an input to all outputs, click that input’s input number.  
N
3.  
Click the Take button to make the configuration changes or Cancel button to  
abandon the configuration changes.  
RGBHV and Audio Settings page  
The RGBHV and Audio Settings page provides a way to set the input audio gain  
and attenuation, set the output volume, mute and unmute all video and audio  
outputs, and (for systems with CrossPoint 450 Plus sync BMEs only) set the  
RGB delay (switching interval). Access the RGBHV and Audio Settings page  
(figure 6-11) by clicking the RGBHV & Audio Settings link on the Control page.  
The control options on this page vary, depending on the configuration of the  
matrix switcher system.  
N
Select Ties 1 through 32  
Select Ties 33 through 64  
Refresh  
Select Global Presets  
Figure 6-11 — RGB and Audio Settings page  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • HTML Operation  
6-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Change the input gain and attenuation (systems with audio BMEs)  
Users can set each input’s level of audio gain or attenuation (-18 dB to +24 dB) from  
the RGBHV and Audio Settings page. Audio levels can be adjusted so there are no  
noticeable volume differences between sources.  
Change an input’s audio level setting as follows:  
1.  
Click the Input drop box. A drop down scroll box appears (figure 6-12).  
Figure 6-12 — Input selection drop box  
2.  
Click and drag the slider or click the scroll up button or scroll down  
button until the desired input is visible.  
3.  
4.  
Click the desired input.  
Click the Input Audio Level (dB) drop box. A drop down scroll box appears  
(figure 6-13).  
Figure 6-13 — Input Audio Level drop box  
5.  
Click and drag the slider or click the scroll up button or scroll down  
button until the desired input is visible.  
6.  
Click the desired gain or attenuation value.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • HTML Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-15  
HTML Operation, cont’d  
Mute and unmute one or all outputs  
Mute one or all outputs as follows:  
1.  
To select an individual output to mute or unmute, click the Output drop box.  
A drop down scroll box appears (figure 6-14).  
Figure 6-14 — Output selection drop box  
2.  
Click and drag the slider or click the scroll up button or scroll down  
button until the desired output is visible.  
3.  
4.  
Click the desired output.  
Click the Video, Audio, or Follow button to select video, audio, or both for  
muting. Each mouse click on a button toggles the other two buttons off.  
5.  
Click the Mute or UnMute button to mute or unmute the selected output.  
Click the Mute All or UnMute All button to mute or unmute all of the outputs.  
Observe the Mute status indications on the page (figure 6-15). Unmuted is  
displayed in green and muted is displayed in red.  
Figure 6-15 — Mute status indications  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • HTML Operation  
6-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Change the RGB delay (sytems with CrossPoint 450 Plus sync BMEs)  
The RGB delay interval defines how long the screen is blanked when switching to  
a new input for the selected output. This value can be set from 00 to 5 seconds in  
0.5-second increments.  
Change the RGB delay as follows:  
1.  
Click the Output drop box. A drop down scroll box appears (figure 6-16).  
Figure 6-16 — Output selection drop box  
2.  
Click and drag the slider or click the scroll up button or scroll down  
button until the desired output is visible.  
3.  
4.  
Click the desired output.  
Click the RGB delay drop box. A drop down scroll box appears (figure 6-17).  
Figure 6-17 — RGB delay drop box  
5.  
Click the desired RGB delay.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • HTML Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-17  
HTML Operation, cont’d  
Change the output volume level (systems with audio BMEs)  
Users can set each output’s volume level through a range of zero steps of  
attenuation (full attenuation, minimum volume) to 64 steps of attenuation (no  
attenuation, full volume) from the RGB and Audio Settings page.  
Change an output’s audio level setting as follows:  
1.  
Click the output drop box. A drop down scroll box appears (figure 6-18).  
Figure 6-18 — Output selection drop box  
2.  
Click and drag the slider or click the scroll up button or scroll down  
button until the desired output is visible.  
3.  
4.  
Click the desired output.  
Click the Volume Steps (64 Max) drop box. A drop down scroll box appears  
(figure 6-19).  
Figure 6-19 — Volume drop box  
5.  
Click the desired output volume step value.  
The table on the next page defines the value of each audio volume step.  
N
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • HTML Operation  
6-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Audio volume adjustment settings  
dB of  
Output  
dB of  
Output  
dB of  
Output  
Number  
of steps  
Number  
of steps  
Number  
of steps  
attenuation volume  
attenuation volume  
attenuation volume  
00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
98  
63  
62  
61  
60  
59  
58  
57  
56  
55  
54  
53  
52  
51  
50  
49  
48  
47  
46  
45  
44  
43  
42  
0%  
5.5%  
7%  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
41  
40  
39  
38  
37  
36  
35  
34  
33  
32  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
38.5%  
40%  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
71.5%  
73%  
8.5%  
10%  
41.5%  
43%  
74.5%  
76%  
11.5%  
13%  
44.5%  
46%  
77.5%  
79%  
14.5%  
16%  
47.5%  
49%  
80.5%  
82%  
17.5%  
19%  
50.5%  
52%  
83.5%  
85%  
20.5%  
22%  
53.5%  
55%  
86.5%  
88%  
8
23.5%  
25%  
56.5%  
58%  
7
89.5%  
91%  
6
26.5%  
28%  
59.5%  
61%  
5
92.5%  
94%  
4
29.5%  
31%  
62.5%  
64%  
3
95.5%  
97%  
2
32.5%  
34%  
65.5%  
67%  
1
98.5%  
100%  
0
35.5%  
37%  
68.5%  
70%  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • HTML Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-19  
HTML Operation, cont’d  
Global Presets page  
You can save and recall global presets from the Global presets page (figure 6-20).  
Access the Global presets page by clicking the Global Presets link on the left of the  
Control page.  
Select Ties 1 through 32  
Select Ties 33 through 64  
Select RGB & Audio Settings  
Refresh  
Figure 6-20 — Global Presets page  
Save a preset  
Save the current configuration (configuration 0) as a preset as follows:  
1.  
2.  
Click the Save Preset button.  
Select the desired preset by clicking on one of the presets listed. To create a  
new preset, click one of the [unassigned] buttons. Overwrite an existing preset  
by clicking an already existing preset.  
3.  
If desired, type over the current name in the box adjacent to the Save Preset  
button.  
Preset names are limited to 12 upper and lower case alphanumeric characters  
and the {space} _ : = and / characters.  
N
N
The following characters are invalid in preset names:  
+ ~ , @ = ‘ [ ] { } < > ’ “ ; : | \ and ?.  
If you do not rename an unassigned button, the matrix switcher BME  
automatically names the preset as Preset {next available number}.  
If you do not rename an existing preset when it is overwritten, the matrix  
switcher BME retains the same name.  
4.  
Click the Accept button.  
Recall a preset  
To recall a global preset to be the current configuration, click the button associated  
with the desired preset.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • HTML Operation  
6-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Special Characters  
The HTML language reserves certain characters for specific functions. The switcher  
will not accept these characters as part of preset names, the switcher’s name,  
passwords, or locally created file names.  
The switcher rejects the following characters:  
{space} + ~ , @ = ‘ [ ] { } < > ’ “ semicolon (;) colon (:) | \ and ?.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • HTML Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-21  
HTML Operation, cont’d  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • HTML Operation  
6-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers  
Appendix A  
A
Ethernet Connection  
Ethernet Link  
Subnetting — A Primer  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ethernet Connection  
Ethernet Link  
ETHERNET  
LINK ACT  
The rear panel Ethernet connector on the CrossPoint 450 Plus and  
MAV Plus switcher BMEs can be connected to an Ethernet LAN or  
WAN. This connection makes SIS control of the switcher possible using  
a computer connected to the same LAN. Although for normal system  
control, the connection is to BME 0, you can connect to and communicate with any  
BME (for example, you connect to other BMEs to perform a firmware upgrade).  
Ethernet connection  
The Ethernet cable can be terminated as a straight-through cable or a crossover  
cable and must be properly terminated for your application (figure A-1).  
•
Crossover cable — Direct connection between the computer and switcher  
BME (usually BME 0)  
•
Patch (straight-through) cable — Connection of a switcher BME (usually  
BME 0) to an Ethernet LAN.  
Patch (straight) cable  
Side 1  
Side 2  
Pin  
1
Wire color  
Pin  
1
Wire color  
White-orange  
Orange  
White-orange  
Orange  
Side  
Clip Down  
2
2
Pins 12345678  
RJ-45  
3
White-green  
Blue  
3
White-green  
Blue  
connector  
4
4
5
White-blue  
Green  
5
White-blue  
Green  
6
6
7
White-brown  
Brown  
7
White-brown  
Brown  
8
8
12345678  
Crossover cable  
Side 1  
Side 2  
Pin  
1
Wire color  
White-orange  
Orange  
Pin  
1
Wire color  
White-green  
Green  
Twisted  
Pairs  
2
2
3
White-green  
Blue  
3
White-orange  
Blue  
1&2  
7&8  
4
4
3&6 4&5  
5
White-blue  
Green  
5
White-blue  
Orange  
6
6
7
White-brown  
Brown  
7
White-brown  
Brown  
8
8
Figure A-1 — RJ-45 connector pinout tables  
Default address  
To access BME 0 via the Ethernet port, you need the switcher’s IP address. If the  
address has been changed to an address comprised of words and characters (an  
alias), you can determine the actual numeric IP address using the Ping utility. If the  
address has not been changed, the factory-specified default is 192.168.254.254.  
Ping can also be used to test the Ethernet link to any CrossPoint 450 Plus or  
MAV Plus switcher BME  
.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Ethernet Connection  
A-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pinging to determine Extron IP address  
The Microsoft Ping utility is available at the DOS prompt. Ping tests the Ethernet  
interface between the computer and a switcher BME (usually BME 0). Ping can also  
be used to determine the actual numeric IP address from an alias and to determine  
the web address.  
Ping the switcher as follows:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
On the Windows task bar, click on Start > Run.  
At the Open prompt, type command.  
Click the OK button.  
At the DOS prompt, type ping {IP address} and then press [Enter]. The  
computer returns a display similar to figure A-2.  
The line Pinging ... reports the actual numeric IP address, regardless of  
whether you entered the actual numeric IP address or an alias name.  
C:\>ping 192.168.254.254  
Pinging 192.168.254.254 with 32 bytes of data:  
Reply from 192.168.254.254: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=128  
Reply from 192.168.254.254: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=128  
Reply from 192.168.254.254: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=128  
Reply from 192.168.254.254: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=128  
Ping statistics for 192.168.254.254:  
Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss),  
Approximate round trip times in milli-seconds:  
Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0ms  
Figure A-2 — Ping response  
Pinging to determine Web IP address  
The Ping utility has a modifier, -a, that directs the command to return the Web  
address rather than the numeric IP address.  
At the DOS prompt, type ping -a {IP address} and then press [Enter]. The computer’s  
return display is similar to the Ping response shown in figure A-2, except that when  
you specify the -a modifier, the line Pinging mail... reports the web IP address  
rather than the numeric IP address, regardless of whether you entered the actual  
numeric IP address or an alias name.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Ethernet Connection  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A-3  
Ethernet Connection, cont’d  
Connecting as a Telnet client  
The Microsoft Telnet utility is available from the DOS prompt. Telnet allows you to  
input SIS commands to BME 0 from the PC via the Ethernet link and the LAN.  
Access the DOS prompt and start Telnet as follows:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
On the Windows task bar, click on Start > Run.  
At the Open prompt, type command.  
Click the OK button.  
At the DOS prompt, type telnet and then press [Enter]. The computer returns  
a display similar to figure A-3.  
Microsoft (R) windows 2000 (TM) Version 5.0 (Build 2195)  
Welcome to Microsoft Telnet Client  
Telnet Client Build 5.00.99203.1  
Escape Character is 'CTRL+]'  
Microsoft Telnet>  
Figure A-3 — Telnet screen  
Telnet tips  
It is not the intention of this manual to detail all of the operations and functionality  
of Telnet; however, some basic level of understanding is necessary for operating the  
switcher via Telnet.  
Open  
Connect to BME 0 using the Open command. Once you are connected to the  
switcher, you can enter the SIS commands the same as you would if you were using  
the RS-232 link.  
Connect to BME 0 as follows:  
1.  
At the Telnet prompt, type open {IP address} and then press [Enter].  
If the switcher is not password protected, no further prompts are displayed  
until you break or disconnect the connection to BME 0.  
If the switcher is password protected, Telnet displays the password prompt.  
If necessary, at the password prompt, type {password} and then press [Enter].  
2.  
Connection to the switcher via the Ethernet can be password protected. There  
are two levels of password protection: administrator and user. A person  
logged on as an administrator has full access to all CrossPoint and/or MAV  
switching capabilities and editing functions. Users can select video and/or  
audio for output, select test patterns, set RGB and audio mutes, select a blue  
screen, and view all settings with the exception of passwords. By default, all  
BMEs ship with both passwords set to {carriage return}.  
Once you are logged in, the BME returns either Login Administrator or Login  
User. No further prompts are displayed until you break or disconnect the  
connection to BME 0.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Ethernet Connection  
A-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Escape character and Esc key  
When Telnet is first started, the utility advises that the Escape character is ‘Ctrl+]’.  
E
Many SIS commands include the keyboard  
key. Consequently, some confusion  
may exist between the Escape character and the Escape key.  
]
Ctrl  
The Telnet Escape character is a key combination, the  
key and the  
key  
pressed simultaneously, that returns you to the Telnet prompt while leaving the  
connection to BME 0 intact.  
E
The Escape key is the  
key on the computer keyboard.  
Local echo  
Once connected to BME 0, by default, Telnet does not display your keystrokes  
on the screen. SIS commands are typed in blind and only the SIS responses are  
displayed on the screen. To command Telnet to show keystrokes, at the Telnet  
prompt, type set local_echo and then press [Enter] before you open the connection to  
the switcher.  
With local echo turned on, keystrokes and the switcher’s responses are displayed  
on the same line. For example: 1*1!In1 Out1 All, where 1*1! is the SIS command  
and In1 Out1 All is the response.  
With local echo turned on, all keystrokes are displayed, even those that should be  
masked, such as the password entry. For example, when entering a password with  
local echo turned on, you see a display such as a*d*m*i*n*, where admin is the  
keyed in password and ***** is the masked response.  
You can turn off local echo by typing unset local_echo and then pressing [Enter] at  
the Telnet prompt. If you are connected to BME 0 and need to access the Telnet  
]
Ctrl  
prompt to turn local echo off, type the Escape character (  
+
).  
Set carriage return-line feed  
Unless commanded otherwise, Telnet transmits a line feed character only (no  
Enter  
carriage return) to the connected switcher when you press the  
key. This is  
the correct setting for SIS communication with the switcher. The Telnet set crlf  
command forces Telnet to transmit carriage return and line feed characters when  
Enter  
is pressed, but if crlf is set, the SIS link with the switcher does not function  
properly.  
Close  
To close the link to the BME, access the Telnet prompt by typing the Escape  
]
Ctrl  
character (  
+
). At the Telnet prompt, type close and then press [Enter].  
Help  
For Telnet command definitions, at the Telnet prompt, type ? and then press [Enter].  
Quit  
Exit the Telnet utility by typing quit and then pressing [Enter] at the Telnet prompt.  
If you are connected to BME 0, access the Telnet prompt by typing the Escape  
]
Ctrl  
character (  
+
).  
Ethernet Connection • Reference Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A-5  
Ethernet Connection, cont’d  
Subnetting — A Primer  
It is not the purpose of this manual to describe TCP/IP protocol in detail. However,  
some understanding of TCP/IP subnetting (a subnet is a subset of a network — a  
set of IP devices that have portions of their IP addresses in common) is necessary  
in order to understand the interaction of BME 0 and the mail server gateway. To  
understand subnetting at the level required to install and operate the switcher, you  
must understand the concepts of a gateway, local and remote devices, IP addresses  
and octets, and subnet masks and octets.  
Gateways  
BME 0 can communicate with the e-mail server that the switcher uses for e-mail  
notification directly (if they are on the same subnet) or the communication can be  
routed via a gateway (a computer that provides a link between different subnets).  
Local and remote devices  
The local and remote devices are defined from the point of view of the function  
being described. In this manual, subnetting is an issue when you are using  
the controlling PC to set TCP/IP and e-mail values in BME 0 (see IP Settings/  
Options window in chapter 5, Matrix Software, and Email Settings page in chapter 6,  
HTML Operation). When you are setting up the variables for e-mail notification,  
which may include subnetting, the matrix switcher is the local device and the  
e-mail server is the remote device.  
IP addresses and octets  
Valid IP addresses consist of four 1-, 2-, or 3-digit numeric subfields, properly called  
octets, separated by dots (periods) (figure A-4). Each octet can be numbered from  
000 through 255. Leading zeroes, up to three digits total per octet, are optional.  
Values of 256 and above are invalid.  
Typical IP Address: 192.168.254.254  
Octets  
Figure A-4 — IP address and octets  
Subnet masks and octets  
The subnet mask (figure A-5) is used to determine whether the local and remote  
devices are on the same subnet or different subnets. The subnet mask consists  
of four numeric octets separated by dots. Each octet can be numbered from  
000 through 255. Leading zeroes, up to three digits total per octet, are optional.  
Each octet typically contains either 255 or 0. The octets determine whether or not  
the same octets of two IP addresses will be compared when determining if two  
devices are on the same subnet.  
255 indicates that this octet will be  
0 indicates that this octet will not be  
compared between two IP addresses.  
compared between two IP addresses.  
Typical Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0  
Octets  
Figure A-5 — Subnet mask and octets  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Ethernet Connection  
A-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Determining whether devices are on the same subnet  
To determine the subnet, the local device’s IP address is compared to the remote  
device’s IP address (figure A-6). Each address’s octets are compared or not  
compared, depending on the value in the related subnet mask octet.  
•
If a subnet mask octet contains the value 255, the related octets of the local  
device’s address and the remote device’s IP address are unmasked.  
Unmasked octets are compared (indicated by ? in figure A-6).  
•
If the subnet mask octet contains the value 0, the related octets of the local  
device’s and remote device’s IP addresses are masked.  
Masked octets are not compared (indicated by X in figure A-6).  
If the unmasked octets of the two IP addresses match (indicated by = in figure A-6)  
(example 1), the two addresses are on the same subnet.  
If the two unmasked fields do not match (indicated by ≠ in figure A-6) (example 2  
and example 3), the addresses are not on the same subnet.  
Example 1  
Local IP Address: 192.168.254.254  
Example 2  
192.168.254.254  
Example 3  
192.168.254.254  
Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (?.?.X.X) 255.255.0.0 (?.?.X.X) 255.255.0.0 (?.?.X.X)  
Remote IP Address: 192.168.2.25  
190.190.2.25  
≠.≠.X.X — No match =.≠.X.X — No match  
(Different subnet) (Different subnet)  
192.190.2.25  
Match?: =.=.X.X — Match  
(Same subnet)  
Figure A-6 — Comparing the IP addresses  
Ethernet Connection • Reference Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A-7  
Ethernet Connection, cont’d  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Ethernet Connection  
A-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers  
Appendix B  
B
Reference Information  
CrossPoint 450 Plus Specifications  
MAV Plus Specifications  
Part Numbers and Accessories  
Button Labels  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference Information  
CrossPoint 450 Plus Specifications  
Video  
Routing ........................................... 64 x 64, 64 x 48, 64 x 32, 48 x 64, 48 x 48, 48 x 32, 32 x 48, or 32 x 64 matrix  
Gain................................................. Unity  
Bandwidth...................................... 450 MHz (-3 dB), fully loaded  
0 - 10 MHz: no more than +0.1 dB to -0.1 dB  
0 - 130 MHz: no more than +1.0 dB to -1.0 dB  
Crosstalk......................................... -80 dB @ 1 MHz, -62 dB @ 10 MHz, -52 dB @ 30 MHz  
Switching speed ............................ 200 ns (max.)  
Video input  
Number/signal type..................... 32, 48, or 64 RGBHV, RGBS, RGsB, RsGsBs, HDTV, component video  
Connectors ..................................... 32, 48, or 64 BNC female  
Nominal level ................................ 1 Vp-p for Y of component video  
0.7 Vp-p for RGB  
0.3 Vp-p for R-Y and B-Y of component video and C of S-video  
Minimum/maximum levels........ Analog: 0.5 V to 2.0 Vp-p with no offset  
Impedance...................................... 75 ohms  
Horizontal frequency.................... 15 kHz to 150 kHz  
Vertical frequency.......................... 30 Hz to 150 Hz  
Return loss...................................... -30 dB @ 5 MHz  
DC offset (max. allowable)........... 1.5 V  
Video output  
Number/signal type..................... 32, 48, or 64 RGBHV, RGBS, RGsB, RsGsBs, HDTV, component video  
Connectors ..................................... 32, 48, or 64 BNC female  
Nominal level ................................ 1 Vp-p for Y of component video  
0.7 Vp-p for RGB  
0.3 Vp-p for R-Y and B-Y of component video and C of S-video  
Minimum/maximum levels........ 0 V to 2.0 Vp-p (follows input)  
Impedance...................................... 75 ohms  
Return loss...................................... <-30 dB @ 5 MHz  
DC offset......................................... 5 mV with input at 0 offset  
Switching type............................... Triple-Action™  
Sync  
Input type....................................... RGBHV, RGBS, RGsB, RsGsBs  
Output type.................................... RGBHV, RGBS, RGsB, RsGsBs (follows input)  
Input level ...................................... 0.5 V to 5.0 Vp-p, 4.0 Vp-p normal  
Output level ................................... AGC to TTL: 4.0 V to 5.0 Vp-p, unterminated  
Input impedance ........................... Inputs 1 to 16: 75 or 510 ohms, switchable  
Inputs 17 to 32, 48, or 64: 510 ohms  
Output impedance........................ 75 ohms  
Max. propagation delay ............... 30 ns  
Max. rise/fall time ........................ 4 ns  
Polarity............................................ Positive or negative (follows input)  
Audio — See MAV Plus Specifications (page B-4)  
Audio input — See MAV Plus Specifications (page B-4)  
Audio output — See MAV Plus Specifications (page B-4)  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Reference Information  
B-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Control/remote — switcher  
Serial control port.......................... 1 RS-232 or RS-422, 9-pin female D connector (rear panel)  
1 RS-232-only 2.5 mm phone jack (front panel)  
Baud rate and protocol  
9-pin D connector.............. 9600 (default), 19200, 38400, 115200 baud (adjustable); 8 data bits, 1 stop bit,  
no parity  
2.5 mm phone jack ............ 9600 baud; 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity  
Serial control pin configurations  
9-pin D connector.............. RS-232: 2 = TX, 3 = RX, 5 = GND  
RS-422: 2 = TX-, 3 = RX-, 5 = GND, 7 = RX+, 8 = Tx+  
2.5 mm phone jack ............ Tip = TX, ring = Rx, sleeve = GND  
Ethernet control port..................... 1 RJ-45 female connector  
Ethernet data rate.......................... 10/100Base-T, half/full duplex with autodetect  
Ethernet protocol........................... ARP, DHCP, ICMP (ping), TCP/IP, Telnet, HTTP  
Program control............................. Extron’s control/configuration program for Windows®  
Extron’s Simple Instruction Set (SIS™)  
Microsoft® Internet Explorer, Telnet  
General  
Power.............................................. 100VACto240VAC,50/60Hz,internal,autoswitchable,primaryandredundant  
(64 or 48) x (32, 48, or 64) wideband: 110 watts at 115 VAC, 60 Hz  
32 x (48 or 64) wideband: 50 watts at 115 VAC, 60 Hz  
(64 x 64) sync: 65 watts at 115 VAC, 60 Hz  
A redundant power supply is standard.  
N
Temperature/humidity................ Storage: -40 to +158 °F (-40 to +70 °C) / 10% to 90%, noncondensing  
Operating: +32 to +122 °F (0 to +50 °C) / 10% to 90%, noncondensing  
Rack mount.................................... Yes, with included parts  
Enclosure type ............................... Metal  
Enclosure dimensions................... 10.5" H x 17.0" W x 14.1" D (6U high, full rack wide)  
26.7 cm H x 43.2 cm W x 35.8 cm D  
Product weight per BME  
32 x 48 through 64 x 64 Series wideband video BMEs  
18.0 lbs (8.2 kg)  
32 x 48 through 64 x 64 Series sync BMEs  
17.0 lbs (7.7 kg)  
Shipping weight per BME  
32 x 48 through 64 x 64 Series wideband video BMEs  
30 lbs (14 kg)  
32 x 48 through 64 x 64 Series sync BMEs  
29 lbs (13 kg)  
DIM weight, international, per BME  
44 lbs (20 kg)  
An RGBHV system will be shipped as 5 BMEs in 5 cartons.  
N
Vibration......................................... ISTA 1A in carton (International Safe Transit Association)  
Listings............................................ UL, CUL  
Compliances................................... CE, FCC Class A, VCCI, AS/NZS, ICES  
MTBF............................................... 30,000 hours  
Warranty......................................... 3 years parts and labor  
All nominal levels are at 10%.  
N
N
Specifications are subject to change without notice.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Reference Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-3  
Reference Information, cont’d  
MAV Plus Specifications  
Video  
Routing ........................................... 64 x 64, 64 x 48, 64 x 32, 48 x 64, 48 x 48, 48 x 32, 32 x 48, or 32 x 64 matrix  
Gain................................................. Unity  
Bandwidth...................................... 150 MHz (-3 dB), fully loaded  
0 - 10 MHz: no more than +0.1 dB to -0.1 dB  
0 - 80 MHz: no more than +1.0 dB to -1.0 dB  
Crosstalk......................................... -80 dB @ 1 MHz, -62 dB @ 10 MHz, -52 dB @ 30 MHz  
Switching speed ............................ 200 ns (max.)  
Video input  
Number/signal type..................... 32, 48, or 64 S-video, composite video  
Connectors ..................................... 32, 48, or 64 BNC female  
Nominal level ................................ 1 Vp-p for Y of S-video, and for composite video  
0.3 Vp-p for C of S-video  
Minimum/maximum levels........ Analog: 0.5 V to 2.0 Vp-p with no offset  
Impedance...................................... 75 ohms  
Horizontal frequency.................... 15 kHz to 150 kHz  
Vertical frequency.......................... 30 Hz to 150 Hz  
Return loss...................................... -30 dB @ 5 MHz  
DC offset (max. allowable)........... 1.5 V  
Video output  
Number/signal type..................... 32, 48, or 64 S-video, composite video  
Connectors ..................................... 32, 48, or 64 BNC female  
Nominal level ................................ 1 Vp-p for Y of S-video, and for composite video  
0.3 Vp-p for C of S-video  
Minimum/maximum levels........ 0 V to 2.0 Vp-p (follows input)  
Impedance...................................... 75 ohms  
Return loss...................................... <-30 dB @ 5 MHz  
DC offset......................................... 5 mV with input at 0 offset  
Switching type............................... Vertical interval  
Sync  
Genlock connectors....................... 1 BNC female  
Standards........................................ NTSC 3.58, NTSC 4.43, PAL, SECAM  
Audio — audio BMEs  
Routing ........................................... (32, 48, or 64) x (32, 48, or 64) stereo or mono matrix  
Both stereo (2 channel) and mono (1 channel) audio models are available.  
N
Gain................................................. Unbalanced output: -6 dB; balanced output 0 dB  
Frequency response ...................... 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.05 dB  
THD + Noise.................................. 0.03% @ 1 kHz at nominal level  
S/N.................................................. >90 dB, balanced, at maximum output (21 dBu), unweighted  
Crosstalk......................................... <-80 dB @ 1 kHz, fully loaded  
Stereo channel separation ............ >80 dB @ 1 kHz  
CMRR.............................................. >75 dB @ 20 Hz to 20 kHz  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Reference Information  
B-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Audio input — audio BMEs  
Number/signal type..................... 32, 48, or 64 stereo balanced/unbalanced or  
32, 48, or 64 mono balanced/unbalanced  
Connectors  
Stereo models..................... (32, 48, or 64) 3.5 mm captive screw connectors, 5 pole  
Mono models..................... (32, 48, or 64) 3.5 mm captive screw connectors, 3 pole  
Impedance...................................... >10k ohm, balanced/unbalanced, DC coupled  
Nominal level ................................ -10 dBV (316 mVrms)  
Maximum level.............................. +19.5 dBu, (balanced or unbalanced) at 1% THD+N  
Input gain adjustment .................. -18 dB to +24 dB, adjustable per input by RS-232/422, Ethernet, or front  
panel  
0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms, 0 dBV = 1 Vrms, 0 dBV 2 dBu  
N
Audio output — audio BMEs  
Number/signal type..................... 32, 48, or 64 stereo balanced/unbalanced or  
32, 48, or 64 mono balanced/unbalanced  
Connectors  
Stereo models..................... (32, 48, or 64) 3.5 mm captive screw connectors, 5 pole  
Mono models..................... (32, 48, or 64) 3.5 mm captive screw connectors, 3 pole  
Impedance...................................... 50 ohms unbalanced, 100 ohms balanced  
Gain error ....................................... 0.1 dB channel to channel  
Maximum level (Hi-Z) ................. >+21 dBu, balanced or unbalanced at 0.1% THD+N  
Maximum level (600 ohm)........... >+15 dBm, balanced or unbalanced at 0.1% THD+N  
Output volume range................... 0 to 64 (-98 dB to 0 dB) in 0.5 dB increments from steps 1 to 64,  
35 dB increment from step 0 to 1  
Control/remote — switcher  
Serial control port.......................... 1 RS-232 or RS-422, 9-pin female D connector  
Baud rate and protocol................. 9600 (default), 19200, 38400, 115200 baud (adjustable); 8 data bits, 1 stop bit,  
no parity  
Serial control pin configurations. RS-232: 2 = TX, 3 = RX, 5 = GND  
RS-422: 2 = TX-, 3 = RX-, 5 = GND, 7 = RX+, 8 = Tx+  
Ethernet control port..................... 1 RJ-45 female connector  
Ethernet data rate.......................... 10/100Base-T, half/full duplex with autodetect  
Ethernet protocol........................... ARP, DHCP, ICMP (ping), TCP/IP, Telnet, HTTP  
Program control............................. Extron’s control/configuration program for Windows®  
Extron’s Simple Instruction Set (SIS™)  
Microsoft® Internet Explorer, Telnet  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Reference Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-5  
Reference Information, cont’d  
General  
Power.............................................. 100 VAC to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, internal, autoswitchable,  
primary and redundant  
Video models: 110 watts at 115 VAC, 60 Hz  
All audio models: 195 watts at 115 VAC, 60 Hz  
A redundant power supply is standard.  
N
Temperature/humidity................ Storage: -40 to +158 °F (-40 to +70 °C) / 10% to 90%, noncondensing  
Operating: +32 to +122 °F (0 to +50 °C) / 10% to 90%, noncondensing  
Rack mount.................................... Yes, with included parts  
Enclosure type ............................... Metal  
Enclosure dimensions  
Video BMEs........................ 10.5" H x 17.0" W x 14.1" D (6U high, full rack wide)  
26.7 cm H x 43.2 cm W x 35.8 cm D  
Audio BMEs....................... 12.25" H x 17.0" W x 14.1" D (7U high, full rack wide)  
31.1 cm H x 43.2 cm W x 35.8 cm D  
Product weight per BME  
32 x 48 through 64 x 64 Series video BMEs  
17.0 lbs (7.7 kg)  
32 x 48 through 64 x 64 Series stereo audio BMEs  
19.0 lbs (8.6 kg)  
32 x 48 through 64 x 64 Series mono audio BMEs  
18.5 lbs (8.4 kg)  
Shipping weight per BME  
32 x 48 through 64 x 64 Series video BMEs  
29 lbs (13 kg)  
32 x 48 through 64 x 64 Series stereo audio BMEs  
31 lbs (14 kg)  
32 x 48 through 64 x 64 Series mono audio BMEs  
30 lbs (14 kg)  
DIM weight, international, per BME  
44 lbs (20 kg)  
Vibration......................................... ISTA 1A in carton (International Safe Transit Association)  
Listings............................................ UL, CUL  
Compliances................................... CE, FCC Class A, VCCI, AS/NZS, ICES  
MTBF............................................... 30,000 hours  
Warranty......................................... 3 years parts and labor  
All nominal levels are at 10%.  
N
N
Specifications are subject to change without notice.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Reference Information  
B-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Part Numbers and Accessories  
CrossPoint 450 Plus system part numbers  
The part numbers below are for complete RGBHV (five BMEs) systems with or  
N
without stereo audio (a sixth, stereo audio BME) only.  
A front panel controller is incorporated into one of the BMEs in the system.  
For custom systems, such as RGBS video, mono audio, or no front panel  
controller, see BME part numbers to order individual BMEs.  
Model  
Part number  
CrossPoint 450 Plus 3248 HV video switcher  
42-078-40  
42-078-45  
CrossPoint 450 Plus 3248 HVA video and audio switcher  
CrossPoint 450 Plus 3264 HV video switcher  
42-079-40  
42-079-45  
CrossPoint 450 Plus 3264 HVA video and audio switcher  
CrossPoint 450 Plus 4832 HV video switcher  
42-080-40  
42-080-45  
CrossPoint 450 Plus 4832 HVA video and audio switcher  
CrossPoint 450 Plus 4848 HV video switcher  
42-081-40  
42-081-45  
CrossPoint 450 Plus 4848 HVA video and audio switcher  
CrossPoint 450 Plus 4864 HV video switcher  
42-082-40  
42-082-45  
CrossPoint 450 Plus 4864 HVA video and audio switcher  
CrossPoint 450 Plus 6432 HV video switcher  
42-083-40  
42-083-45  
CrossPoint 450 Plus 6432 HVA video and audio switcher  
CrossPoint 450 Plus 6448 HV video switcher  
42-084-40  
42-084-45  
CrossPoint 450 Plus 6448 HVA video and audio switcher  
CrossPoint 450 Plus 6464 HV video switcher  
42-085-40  
42-085-45  
CrossPoint 450 Plus 6464 HVA video and audio switcher  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Reference Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-7  
Reference Information, cont’d  
MAV Plus system part numbers  
The part numbers below are for composite video (one BME) switchers with or  
N
without stereo audio (a second, stereo audio BME) only.  
A front panel controller is incorporated into the video BME.  
For S-video and component video systems, systems with mono audio, or audio  
only switchers, see BME part numbers to order individual BMEs.  
Model  
Part number  
MAV Plus 3248 V video switcher  
60-761-31  
42-078-15  
MAV Plus 3248 AV video and audio switcher  
MAV Plus 3264 V video switcher  
60-762-31  
42-079-15  
MAV Plus 3264 AV video and audio switcher  
MAV Plus 4832 V video switcher  
60-763-31  
42-080-15  
MAV Plus 4832 AV video and audio switcher  
MAV Plus 4848 V video switcher  
60-764-31  
42-081-15  
MAV Plus 4848 AV video and audio switcher  
MAV Plus 4864 V video switcher  
60-765-31  
42-082-15  
MAV Plus 4864 AV video and audio switcher  
MAV Plus 6432 V video switcher  
60-766-31  
42-083-15  
MAV Plus 6432 AV video and audio switcher  
MAV Plus 6448 V video switcher  
60-767-31  
42-084-15  
MAV Plus 6448 AV video and audio switcher  
MAV Plus 6464 V video switcher  
60-768-31  
42-085-15  
MAV Plus 6464 AV video and audio switcher  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Reference Information  
B-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BME part numbers  
The complete system part numbers listed on the preceding pages are for either:  
N
•
•
RGBHV (three wideband video and two sync BMEs) systems  
Composite video (one video BME) switchers  
Any of the above matrix switchers is available as a complete system with or  
without stereo audio (an extra, stereo audio BME).  
For custom systems, such as RGBS video, S-video, component video, or systems  
with mono audio, see the part numbers below and order the required BMEs for  
your system.  
•
One CrossPoint 450 Plus wideband video BME for each high resolution  
video plane (typically three required)  
•
•
One CrossPoint 450 Plus sync BME for each sync plane  
One MAV Plus video BME for each low resolution video plane:  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Three BMEs for component video  
Two BMEs for S-video  
One BME for composite video  
•
If desired, one MAV Plus audio (stereo or mono) BME  
Order all BMEs of the same matrix size, such as 6464.  
If desired, order one wideband video BME with an optional QuickSwitch-Front  
Panel Controller (QS-FPC™).  
•
A system should include only one operational QS-FPC.  
•
The QS-FPC is standard, not optional, on MAV Plus video BMEs. In  
systems with multiple BMEs, only one QS-FPC is operational.  
ꢀ
Multiple QS-FPCs are potentially confusing. An S-video or component  
video system has multiple QS-FPCs by default. To avoid confusion,  
Extron recommends that you lock the redundant QS-FPCs. See Locking  
out the front panel (Executive mode) on page 3-40.  
•
A front panel controller cannot be installed on a sync or audio BME.  
Connect the BMEs as detailed in chapter 2, Installation.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Reference Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-9  
Reference Information, cont’d  
CrossPoint 450 Plus wideband video BMEs  
BME  
Part number  
60-761-40  
60-761-41  
60-762-40  
60-762-41  
60-763-40  
60-763-41  
60-764-40  
60-764-41  
60-765-40  
60-765-41  
60-766-40  
60-766-41  
60-767-40  
60-767-41  
60-768-40  
60-768-41  
CrossPoint 450 Plus 3248 WB  
CrossPoint 450 Plus 3248 WB FPC  
CrossPoint 450 Plus 3264 WB  
CrossPoint 450 Plus 3264 WB FPC  
CrossPoint 450 Plus 4832 WB  
CrossPoint 450 Plus 4832 WB FPC  
CrossPoint 450 Plus 4848 WB  
CrossPoint 450 Plus 4848 WB FPC  
CrossPoint 450 Plus 4864 WB  
CrossPoint 450 Plus 4864 WB FPC  
CrossPoint 450 Plus 6432 WB  
CrossPoint 450 Plus 6432 WB FPC  
CrossPoint 450 Plus 6448 WB  
CrossPoint 450 Plus 6448 WB FPC  
CrossPoint 450 Plus 6464 WB  
CrossPoint 450 Plus 6464 WB FPC  
CrossPoint 450 Plus sync BMEs  
Only one sync BME matrix size is available for separate purchase. Use the  
6464 matrix size sync BME for all custom matrix switcher configurations of all  
matrix sizes 3248 and larger.  
N
BME  
Part number  
CrossPoint 450 Plus 6464 sync  
60-768-20  
MAV Plus video BMEs  
BME  
Part number  
60-761-31  
60-762-31  
60-763-31  
60-764-31  
60-765-31  
60-766-31  
60-767-31  
60-768-31  
MAV Plus 3248 video FPC  
MAV Plus 3264 video FPC  
MAV Plus 4832 video FPC  
MAV Plus 4848 video FPC  
MAV Plus 4864 video FPC  
MAV Plus 6432 video FPC  
MAV Plus 6448 video FPC  
MAV Plus 6464 video FPC  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Reference Information  
B-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAV Plus stereo audio BMEs  
BME  
Part number  
60-761-15  
60-762-15  
60-763-15  
60-764-15  
60-765-15  
60-766-15  
60-767-15  
60-768-15  
MAV Plus 3248 stereo audio  
MAV Plus 3264 stereo audio  
MAV Plus 4832 stereo audio  
MAV Plus 4848 stereo audio  
MAV Plus 4864 stereo audio  
MAV Plus 6432 stereo audio  
MAV Plus 6448 stereo audio  
MAV Plus 6464 stereo audio  
MAV Plus mono audio BMEs  
BME  
Part number  
60-761-10  
60-762-10  
60-763-10  
60-764-10  
60-765-10  
60-766-10  
60-767-10  
60-768-10  
MAV Plus 3248 mono audio  
MAV Plus 3264 mono audio  
MAV Plus 4832 mono audio  
MAV Plus 4848 mono audio  
MAV Plus 4864 mono audio  
MAV Plus 6432 mono audio  
MAV Plus 6448 mono audio  
MAV Plus 6464 mono audio  
Included parts  
Part  
Part number  
5-pole captive screw audio connectors  
(with stereo audio BMEs only)  
10-703-12LF  
3-pole captive screw audio connectors  
(with mono audio BMEs only)  
10-703-11LF  
Matrix Switchers Control Program and Button Label Generator  
CrossPoint 450 Plus/MAV Matrix Plus Switcher User’s Manual  
BNC extraction tool (with video and sync BMEs)  
100-096-01  
Replacement parts  
Part  
Part number  
Button cap and diffuser kit (set of 3 button cap assemblies)  
70-352-01  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Reference Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-11  
Reference Information, cont’d  
Optional accessories  
These items can be ordered separately:  
Adapters, power supplies, labels  
Part number  
MKP 1000 remote keypad  
Black  
60-239-02  
60-239-03  
60-239-05  
60-239-51  
60-298-01  
White  
RAL9010 white  
WT (water-tight) (gray)  
MCP 1000M (master)  
MKP 2000 matrix switcher X-Y remote control panel  
Black  
60-682-02  
60-682-03  
60-682-05  
White  
RAL9010 white  
MKP 3000  
Black  
60-708-02  
60-708-03  
60-708-05  
70-352-01  
White  
RAL9010 white  
Button cap and diffuser kit (set of 3 button cap assemblies)  
Cables  
When using signals with a scanning frequency of 15-125 kHz and running  
distances of 100 feet or more, use high resolution BNC cables to achieve maximum  
performance.  
Bulk cable  
RG6 super high resolution cable  
Part number  
22-100-02  
RG6-5/500, non-plenum 5-conductor 500’/150 m spool  
RG6-1/1000, non-plenum 1-conductor 1000’/300 m spool  
RG6-1/500, non-plenum 1-conductor 500’/150 m spool  
RG6P/1000, plenum 1-conductor 1000’/300 m spool  
RG6P/500, plenum 1-conductor 500’/150 m spool  
BNC male SHR crimp connectors, qty. 500  
22-098-03  
22-098-02  
22-164-03  
22-164-02  
100-260-02  
100-260-01  
BNC male SHR crimp connectors, qty. 50  
RG59 high resolution cable  
Part number  
22-145-03  
RG59/1000 non-plenum 1-conductor 1000’/300 m spool  
RG59/500 non-plenum 1-conductor 500’/150 m spool  
RG59P/1000 plenum 1-conductor 1000’/300 m spool  
RG59P/500 plenum 1-conductor 500’/150 m spool  
BNC male RG59/HR crimp connectors, qty. 500  
BNC male RG59/HR crimp connectors, qty. 50  
22-145-02  
22-146-03  
22-146-02  
100-257-02  
100-257-01  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Reference Information  
B-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MHR mini high resolution cable  
Part number  
22-126-03  
22-126-02  
22-020-03  
22-020-02  
22-103-03  
22-103-02  
100-250-01  
MHRHF-5/300 m halogen-free 1000’/300 m spool  
MHRHF-5/150 m halogen-free 500’/150 m spool  
MHR-5/1000 non-plenum 5-conductor 1000’/300 m spool  
MHR-5/500 non-plenum 1-conductor 500’/150 m spool  
MHR-5P/1000 plenum 5-conductor 1000’/300 m spool  
MHR-5P/500 plenum 1-conductor 500’/150 m spool  
BNC male mini HR crimp connectors, qty. 50  
Terminated cable assemblies  
RG6 super high resolution cable  
Part number  
26-369-04  
26-369-12  
26-369-05  
26-369-06  
26-369-07  
26-383-04  
26-383-12  
26-383-05  
26-383-06  
26-383-07  
RG6-5/25 non-plenum 5-conductor 25’/7.6 m  
RG6-5/35 non-plenum 5-conductor 35’/10.6 m  
RG6-5/50 non-plenum 5-conductor 50’/15.2 m  
RG6-5/75 non-plenum 5-conductor 75’/22.8 m  
RG6-5/100 non-plenum 5-conductor 100’/30.4 m  
RG6-1/25 non-plenum 1-conductor 25’/7.6 m  
RG6-1/35 non-plenum 1-conductor 35’/10.6 m  
RG6-1/50 non-plenum 1-conductor 50’/15.2 m  
RG6-1/75 non-plenum 1-conductor 75’/22.8 m  
RG6-1/100 non-plenum 1-conductor 100’/30.4 m  
MHR mini high resolution cable  
Part number  
26-260-03  
26-260-17  
26-260-04  
26-260-16  
26-260-05  
26-378-04  
26-378-12  
26-378-05  
26-378-06  
26-378-07  
MHR-5/25 non-plenum 5-conductor 25’/7.6 m  
MHR-5/35 non-plenum 5-conductor 35’/10.6 m  
MHR-5/50 non-plenum 5-conductor 50’/15.2 m  
MHR-5/75 non-plenum 5-conductor 75’/22.8 m  
MHR-5/100 non-plenum 5-conductor 100’/30.4 m  
MHR-5P/25 plenum 5-conductor 25’/7.6 m  
MHR-5P/35 plenum 5-conductor 35’/10.6 m  
MHR-5P/50 plenum 5-conductor 50’/15.2 m  
MHR-5P/75 plenum 5-conductor 75’/22.8 m  
MHR-5P/100 plenum 5-conductor 100’/30.4 m  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Reference Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-13  
Reference Information, cont’d  
Button Labels  
Page B-15 provides strips of blank button labels. If desired, photocopy them or cut  
them out of the manual, write button information in each button area as desired,  
and put them in the switcher’s input or output buttons’ windows. You can also  
create labels using the Button-Label Generator software (see chapter 5, Matrix  
Software).  
Installing labels in the matrix switcher’s buttons  
Use the following procedure to install new labels in the matrix switcher’s front  
panel buttons.  
1.  
Make new labels using either the blanks on page B-15  
or the Button-Label Generator software. Cut them  
out.  
Use notch to  
remove button.  
2.  
Remove the button from the switcher by grasping  
the button firmly and pulling it away from the front  
panel.  
There are different button models available. Your  
N
buttons may appear different.  
3.  
4.  
5.  
Use a small screwdriver or Extron Tweeker to gently  
lever the button cap off of the white backing plate.  
TEXT  
Insert a button label into the cap and gently but  
firmly press the cap onto the white backing plate.  
Separate two  
piece button here.  
Press the button into place in the matrix switcher  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Reference Information  
B-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Reference Information  
B-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference Information, cont’d  
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Reference Information  
B-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FCC Cla ss A No t ice  
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital  
device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable  
protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial  
environment. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not  
installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to  
radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful  
interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.  
Note: This unit was tested with shielded cables on the peripheral devices. Shielded cables must be  
used with the unit to ensure compliance.  
Ext ro n ’s Wa rra n t y  
Extron Electronics warrants this product against defects in materials and workmanship for a period  
of three years from the date of purchase. In the event of malfunction during the warranty period  
attributable directly to faulty workmanship and/ or materials, Extron Electronics will, at its option,  
repair or replace said products or components, to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore  
said product to proper operating condition, provided that it is returned within the warranty period,  
with proof of purchase and description of malfunction to:  
USA, Canada, South America,  
and Central America:  
Europe, Africa, and the Middle East:  
Extron Electronics, Europe  
Beeldschermweg 6C  
3821 AH Amersfoort  
The Netherlands  
Extron Electronics  
1001 East Ball Road  
Anaheim, CA 92805, USA  
Asia:  
Japan:  
Extron Electronics, Asia  
135 Joo Seng Road, #04-01  
PM Industrial Bldg.  
Singapore 368363  
Extron Electronics, Japan  
Kyodo Building  
16 Ichibancho  
Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo 102-0082  
Japan  
This Limited Warranty does not apply if the fault has been caused by misuse, improper handling care,  
electrical or mechanical abuse, abnormal operating conditions or non-Extron authorized modification  
to the product.  
If it has been determined that the product is defective, please call Extron and ask for an Applications  
Engineer at (714) 491-1500 (USA), 31.33.453.4040 (Europe), 65.383.4400 (Asia), or 81.3.3511.7655 (Japan)  
to receive an RA# (Return Authorization number). This will begin the repair process as quickly as  
possible.  
Units must be returned insured, with shipping charges prepaid. If not insured, you assume the risk of  
loss or damage during shipment. Returned units must include the serial number and a description of  
the problem, as well as the name of the person to contact in case there are any questions.  
Extron Electronics makes no further warranties either expressed or implied with respect to the  
product and its quality, performance, merchantability, or fitness for any particular use. In no event  
will Extron Electronics be liable for direct, indirect, or consequential damages resulting from any  
defect in this product even if Extron Electronics has been advised of such damage.  
Please note that laws vary from state to state and country to country, and that some provisions of this  
warranty may not apply to you.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Extron Electronics, USA  
1230 South Lewis Street  
Anaheim, CA 92805  
USA  
Extron Electronics, Europe  
Beeldschermweg 6C  
3821 AH Amersfoort  
The Netherlands  
Extron Electronics, Asia  
135 Joo Seng Road, #04-01  
PM Industrial Building  
Singapore 368363  
Extron Electronics, Japan  
Kyodo Building  
16 Ichibancho  
Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo 102-0082 Japan  
+81.3.3511.7655  
714.491.1500  
+31.33.453.4040  
+65.6383.4400  
www.extron.com  
Fax 714.491.1517  
Fax +31.33.453.4050  
Fax +65.6383.4664  
Fax +81.3.3511.7656  
© 2006 Extron Electronics. All rights reserved.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Electro Voice Portable Speaker Sb120a User Manual
FieldServer Server FS RA CLX BAS User Manual
Fortinet Network Card FortiMail 2000A User Manual
FujiFilm Camcorder J100 User Manual
FujiFilm Digital Camera Z10fd User Manual
Furuno SONAR CH 28 User Manual
Gefen Log Splitter gtb hd4k2k 142 User Manual
GE Range ARR 244 User Manual
GE Thermometer DPI 820 User Manual
GE Utility Trailer GEK 95352 User Manual